xref: /vim-8.2.3635/src/misc1.c (revision 899dddf8)
1 /* vi:set ts=8 sts=4 sw=4:
2  *
3  * VIM - Vi IMproved	by Bram Moolenaar
4  *
5  * Do ":help uganda"  in Vim to read copying and usage conditions.
6  * Do ":help credits" in Vim to see a list of people who contributed.
7  * See README.txt for an overview of the Vim source code.
8  */
9 
10 /*
11  * misc1.c: functions that didn't seem to fit elsewhere
12  */
13 
14 #include "vim.h"
15 #include "version.h"
16 
17 #ifdef HAVE_FCNTL_H
18 # include <fcntl.h>		/* for chdir() */
19 #endif
20 
21 static char_u *vim_version_dir __ARGS((char_u *vimdir));
22 static char_u *remove_tail __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *name));
23 static int copy_indent __ARGS((int size, char_u	*src));
24 
25 /*
26  * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in the current line.
27  */
28     int
29 get_indent()
30 {
31     return get_indent_str(ml_get_curline(), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
32 }
33 
34 /*
35  * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum".
36  */
37     int
38 get_indent_lnum(lnum)
39     linenr_T	lnum;
40 {
41     return get_indent_str(ml_get(lnum), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
42 }
43 
44 #if defined(FEAT_FOLDING) || defined(PROTO)
45 /*
46  * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum" of buffer
47  * "buf".
48  */
49     int
50 get_indent_buf(buf, lnum)
51     buf_T	*buf;
52     linenr_T	lnum;
53 {
54     return get_indent_str(ml_get_buf(buf, lnum, FALSE), (int)buf->b_p_ts);
55 }
56 #endif
57 
58 /*
59  * count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "ptr", with
60  * 'tabstop' at "ts"
61  */
62     int
63 get_indent_str(ptr, ts)
64     char_u	*ptr;
65     int		ts;
66 {
67     int		count = 0;
68 
69     for ( ; *ptr; ++ptr)
70     {
71 	if (*ptr == TAB)    /* count a tab for what it is worth */
72 	    count += ts - (count % ts);
73 	else if (*ptr == ' ')
74 	    ++count;		/* count a space for one */
75 	else
76 	    break;
77     }
78     return count;
79 }
80 
81 /*
82  * Set the indent of the current line.
83  * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
84  * Caller must take care of undo.
85  * "flags":
86  *	SIN_CHANGED:	call changed_bytes() if the line was changed.
87  *	SIN_INSERT:	insert the indent in front of the line.
88  *	SIN_UNDO:	save line for undo before changing it.
89  * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
90  */
91     int
92 set_indent(size, flags)
93     int		size;
94     int		flags;
95 {
96     char_u	*p;
97     char_u	*newline;
98     char_u	*oldline;
99     char_u	*s;
100     int		todo;
101     int		ind_len;
102     int		line_len;
103     int		doit = FALSE;
104     int		ind_done;
105     int		tab_pad;
106     int		retval = FALSE;
107 
108     /*
109      * First check if there is anything to do and compute the number of
110      * characters needed for the indent.
111      */
112     todo = size;
113     ind_len = 0;
114     p = oldline = ml_get_curline();
115 
116     /* Calculate the buffer size for the new indent, and check to see if it
117      * isn't already set */
118 
119     /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */
120     if (!curbuf->b_p_et)
121     {
122 	/* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
123 	 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
124 	if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
125 	{
126 	    ind_done = 0;
127 
128 	    /* count as many characters as we can use */
129 	    while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
130 	    {
131 		if (*p == TAB)
132 		{
133 		    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
134 					   - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
135 		    /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
136 		    if (todo < tab_pad)
137 			break;
138 		    todo -= tab_pad;
139 		    ++ind_len;
140 		    ind_done += tab_pad;
141 		}
142 		else
143 		{
144 		    --todo;
145 		    ++ind_len;
146 		    ++ind_done;
147 		}
148 		++p;
149 	    }
150 
151 	    /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
152 	    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
153 	    if (todo >= tab_pad)
154 	    {
155 		doit = TRUE;
156 		todo -= tab_pad;
157 		++ind_len;
158 		/* ind_done += tab_pad; */
159 	    }
160 	}
161 
162 	/* count tabs required for indent */
163 	while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
164 	{
165 	    if (*p != TAB)
166 		doit = TRUE;
167 	    else
168 		++p;
169 	    todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
170 	    ++ind_len;
171 	    /* ind_done += (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; */
172 	}
173     }
174     /* count spaces required for indent */
175     while (todo > 0)
176     {
177 	if (*p != ' ')
178 	    doit = TRUE;
179 	else
180 	    ++p;
181 	--todo;
182 	++ind_len;
183 	/* ++ind_done; */
184     }
185 
186     /* Return if the indent is OK already. */
187     if (!doit && !vim_iswhite(*p) && !(flags & SIN_INSERT))
188 	return FALSE;
189 
190     /* Allocate memory for the new line. */
191     if (flags & SIN_INSERT)
192 	p = oldline;
193     else
194 	p = skipwhite(p);
195     line_len = (int)STRLEN(p) + 1;
196     newline = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
197     if (newline == NULL)
198 	return FALSE;
199 
200     /* Put the characters in the new line. */
201     s = newline;
202     todo = size;
203     /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */
204     if (!curbuf->b_p_et)
205     {
206 	/* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
207 	 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
208 	if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
209 	{
210 	    p = oldline;
211 	    ind_done = 0;
212 
213 	    while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
214 	    {
215 		if (*p == TAB)
216 		{
217 		    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
218 					   - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
219 		    /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
220 		    if (todo < tab_pad)
221 			break;
222 		    todo -= tab_pad;
223 		    ind_done += tab_pad;
224 		}
225 		else
226 		{
227 		    --todo;
228 		    ++ind_done;
229 		}
230 		*s++ = *p++;
231 	    }
232 
233 	    /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
234 	    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
235 	    if (todo >= tab_pad)
236 	    {
237 		*s++ = TAB;
238 		todo -= tab_pad;
239 	    }
240 
241 	    p = skipwhite(p);
242 	}
243 
244 	while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
245 	{
246 	    *s++ = TAB;
247 	    todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
248 	}
249     }
250     while (todo > 0)
251     {
252 	*s++ = ' ';
253 	--todo;
254     }
255     mch_memmove(s, p, (size_t)line_len);
256 
257     /* Replace the line (unless undo fails). */
258     if (!(flags & SIN_UNDO) || u_savesub(curwin->w_cursor.lnum) == OK)
259     {
260 	ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, newline, FALSE);
261 	if (flags & SIN_CHANGED)
262 	    changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
263 	/* Correct saved cursor position if it's after the indent. */
264 	if (saved_cursor.lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum
265 				&& saved_cursor.col >= (colnr_T)(p - oldline))
266 	    saved_cursor.col += ind_len - (p - oldline);
267 	retval = TRUE;
268     }
269     else
270 	vim_free(newline);
271 
272     curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
273     return retval;
274 }
275 
276 /*
277  * Copy the indent from ptr to the current line (and fill to size)
278  * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
279  * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
280  */
281     static int
282 copy_indent(size, src)
283     int		size;
284     char_u	*src;
285 {
286     char_u	*p = NULL;
287     char_u	*line = NULL;
288     char_u	*s;
289     int		todo;
290     int		ind_len;
291     int		line_len = 0;
292     int		tab_pad;
293     int		ind_done;
294     int		round;
295 
296     /* Round 1: compute the number of characters needed for the indent
297      * Round 2: copy the characters. */
298     for (round = 1; round <= 2; ++round)
299     {
300 	todo = size;
301 	ind_len = 0;
302 	ind_done = 0;
303 	s = src;
304 
305 	/* Count/copy the usable portion of the source line */
306 	while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*s))
307 	{
308 	    if (*s == TAB)
309 	    {
310 		tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
311 					   - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
312 		/* Stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
313 		if (todo < tab_pad)
314 		    break;
315 		todo -= tab_pad;
316 		ind_done += tab_pad;
317 	    }
318 	    else
319 	    {
320 		--todo;
321 		++ind_done;
322 	    }
323 	    ++ind_len;
324 	    if (round == 2)
325 		*p++ = *s;
326 	    ++s;
327 	}
328 
329 	/* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
330 	tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
331 	if (todo >= tab_pad)
332 	{
333 	    todo -= tab_pad;
334 	    ++ind_len;
335 	    if (round == 2)
336 		*p++ = TAB;
337 	}
338 
339 	/* Add tabs required for indent */
340 	while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
341 	{
342 	    todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
343 	    ++ind_len;
344 	    if (round == 2)
345 		*p++ = TAB;
346 	}
347 
348 	/* Count/add spaces required for indent */
349 	while (todo > 0)
350 	{
351 	    --todo;
352 	    ++ind_len;
353 	    if (round == 2)
354 		*p++ = ' ';
355 	}
356 
357 	if (round == 1)
358 	{
359 	    /* Allocate memory for the result: the copied indent, new indent
360 	     * and the rest of the line. */
361 	    line_len = (int)STRLEN(ml_get_curline()) + 1;
362 	    line = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
363 	    if (line == NULL)
364 		return FALSE;
365 	    p = line;
366 	}
367     }
368 
369     /* Append the original line */
370     mch_memmove(p, ml_get_curline(), (size_t)line_len);
371 
372     /* Replace the line */
373     ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, line, FALSE);
374 
375     /* Put the cursor after the indent. */
376     curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
377     return TRUE;
378 }
379 
380 /*
381  * Return the indent of the current line after a number.  Return -1 if no
382  * number was found.  Used for 'n' in 'formatoptions': numbered list.
383  * Since a pattern is used it can actually handle more than numbers.
384  */
385     int
386 get_number_indent(lnum)
387     linenr_T	lnum;
388 {
389     colnr_T	col;
390     pos_T	pos;
391     regmmatch_T	regmatch;
392 
393     if (lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
394 	return -1;
395     pos.lnum = 0;
396     regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(curbuf->b_p_flp, RE_MAGIC);
397     if (regmatch.regprog != NULL)
398     {
399 	regmatch.rmm_ic = FALSE;
400 	regmatch.rmm_maxcol = 0;
401 	if (vim_regexec_multi(&regmatch, curwin, curbuf, lnum, (colnr_T)0))
402 	{
403 	    pos.lnum = regmatch.endpos[0].lnum + lnum;
404 	    pos.col = regmatch.endpos[0].col;
405 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
406 	    pos.coladd = 0;
407 #endif
408 	}
409 	vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
410     }
411 
412     if (pos.lnum == 0 || *ml_get_pos(&pos) == NUL)
413 	return -1;
414     getvcol(curwin, &pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
415     return (int)col;
416 }
417 
418 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT)
419 
420 static int cin_is_cinword __ARGS((char_u *line));
421 
422 /*
423  * Return TRUE if the string "line" starts with a word from 'cinwords'.
424  */
425     static int
426 cin_is_cinword(line)
427     char_u	*line;
428 {
429     char_u	*cinw;
430     char_u	*cinw_buf;
431     int		cinw_len;
432     int		retval = FALSE;
433     int		len;
434 
435     cinw_len = (int)STRLEN(curbuf->b_p_cinw) + 1;
436     cinw_buf = alloc((unsigned)cinw_len);
437     if (cinw_buf != NULL)
438     {
439 	line = skipwhite(line);
440 	for (cinw = curbuf->b_p_cinw; *cinw; )
441 	{
442 	    len = copy_option_part(&cinw, cinw_buf, cinw_len, ",");
443 	    if (STRNCMP(line, cinw_buf, len) == 0
444 		    && (!vim_iswordc(line[len]) || !vim_iswordc(line[len - 1])))
445 	    {
446 		retval = TRUE;
447 		break;
448 	    }
449 	}
450 	vim_free(cinw_buf);
451     }
452     return retval;
453 }
454 #endif
455 
456 /*
457  * open_line: Add a new line below or above the current line.
458  *
459  * For VREPLACE mode, we only add a new line when we get to the end of the
460  * file, otherwise we just start replacing the next line.
461  *
462  * Caller must take care of undo.  Since VREPLACE may affect any number of
463  * lines however, it may call u_save_cursor() again when starting to change a
464  * new line.
465  * "flags": OPENLINE_DELSPACES	delete spaces after cursor
466  *	    OPENLINE_DO_COM	format comments
467  *	    OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL	keep trailing spaces
468  *	    OPENLINE_MARKFIX	adjust mark positions after the line break
469  *
470  * Return TRUE for success, FALSE for failure
471  */
472     int
473 open_line(dir, flags, old_indent)
474     int		dir;		/* FORWARD or BACKWARD */
475     int		flags;
476     int		old_indent;	/* indent for after ^^D in Insert mode */
477 {
478     char_u	*saved_line;		/* copy of the original line */
479     char_u	*next_line = NULL;	/* copy of the next line */
480     char_u	*p_extra = NULL;	/* what goes to next line */
481     int		less_cols = 0;		/* less columns for mark in new line */
482     int		less_cols_off = 0;	/* columns to skip for mark adjust */
483     pos_T	old_cursor;		/* old cursor position */
484     int		newcol = 0;		/* new cursor column */
485     int		newindent = 0;		/* auto-indent of the new line */
486     int		n;
487     int		trunc_line = FALSE;	/* truncate current line afterwards */
488     int		retval = FALSE;		/* return value, default is FAIL */
489 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
490     int		extra_len = 0;		/* length of p_extra string */
491     int		lead_len;		/* length of comment leader */
492     char_u	*lead_flags;	/* position in 'comments' for comment leader */
493     char_u	*leader = NULL;		/* copy of comment leader */
494 #endif
495     char_u	*allocated = NULL;	/* allocated memory */
496 #if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_LISP) \
497 	|| defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
498     char_u	*p;
499 #endif
500     int		saved_char = NUL;	/* init for GCC */
501 #if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
502     pos_T	*pos;
503 #endif
504 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
505     int		do_si = (!p_paste && curbuf->b_p_si
506 # ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
507 					&& !curbuf->b_p_cin
508 # endif
509 			);
510     int		no_si = FALSE;		/* reset did_si afterwards */
511     int		first_char = NUL;	/* init for GCC */
512 #endif
513 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
514     int		vreplace_mode;
515 #endif
516     int		did_append;		/* appended a new line */
517     int		saved_pi = curbuf->b_p_pi; /* copy of preserveindent setting */
518 
519     /*
520      * make a copy of the current line so we can mess with it
521      */
522     saved_line = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
523     if (saved_line == NULL)	    /* out of memory! */
524 	return FALSE;
525 
526 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
527     if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
528     {
529 	/*
530 	 * With VREPLACE we make a copy of the next line, which we will be
531 	 * starting to replace.  First make the new line empty and let vim play
532 	 * with the indenting and comment leader to its heart's content.  Then
533 	 * we grab what it ended up putting on the new line, put back the
534 	 * original line, and call ins_char() to put each new character onto
535 	 * the line, replacing what was there before and pushing the right
536 	 * stuff onto the replace stack.  -- webb.
537 	 */
538 	if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum < orig_line_count)
539 	    next_line = vim_strsave(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1));
540 	else
541 	    next_line = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
542 	if (next_line == NULL)	    /* out of memory! */
543 	    goto theend;
544 
545 	/*
546 	 * In VREPLACE mode, a NL replaces the rest of the line, and starts
547 	 * replacing the next line, so push all of the characters left on the
548 	 * line onto the replace stack.  We'll push any other characters that
549 	 * might be replaced at the start of the next line (due to autoindent
550 	 * etc) a bit later.
551 	 */
552 	replace_push(NUL);  /* Call twice because BS over NL expects it */
553 	replace_push(NUL);
554 	p = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
555 	while (*p != NUL)
556 	    replace_push(*p++);
557 	saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
558     }
559 #endif
560 
561     if ((State & INSERT)
562 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
563 	    && !(State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
564 #endif
565 	    )
566     {
567 	p_extra = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
568 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
569 	if (do_si)		/* need first char after new line break */
570 	{
571 	    p = skipwhite(p_extra);
572 	    first_char = *p;
573 	}
574 #endif
575 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
576 	extra_len = (int)STRLEN(p_extra);
577 #endif
578 	saved_char = *p_extra;
579 	*p_extra = NUL;
580     }
581 
582     u_clearline();		/* cannot do "U" command when adding lines */
583 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
584     did_si = FALSE;
585 #endif
586     ai_col = 0;
587 
588     /*
589      * If we just did an auto-indent, then we didn't type anything on
590      * the prior line, and it should be truncated.  Do this even if 'ai' is not
591      * set because automatically inserting a comment leader also sets did_ai.
592      */
593     if (dir == FORWARD && did_ai)
594 	trunc_line = TRUE;
595 
596     /*
597      * If 'autoindent' and/or 'smartindent' is set, try to figure out what
598      * indent to use for the new line.
599      */
600     if (curbuf->b_p_ai
601 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
602 			|| do_si
603 #endif
604 					    )
605     {
606 	/*
607 	 * count white space on current line
608 	 */
609 	newindent = get_indent_str(saved_line, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
610 	if (newindent == 0)
611 	    newindent = old_indent;	/* for ^^D command in insert mode */
612 
613 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
614 	/*
615 	 * Do smart indenting.
616 	 * In insert/replace mode (only when dir == FORWARD)
617 	 * we may move some text to the next line. If it starts with '{'
618 	 * don't add an indent. Fixes inserting a NL before '{' in line
619 	 *	"if (condition) {"
620 	 */
621 	if (!trunc_line && do_si && *saved_line != NUL
622 				    && (p_extra == NULL || first_char != '{'))
623 	{
624 	    char_u  *ptr;
625 	    char_u  last_char;
626 
627 	    old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
628 	    ptr = saved_line;
629 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
630 	    if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
631 		lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE);
632 	    else
633 		lead_len = 0;
634 # endif
635 	    if (dir == FORWARD)
636 	    {
637 		/*
638 		 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
639 		 * recognised as comments.
640 		 */
641 		if (
642 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
643 			lead_len == 0 &&
644 # endif
645 			ptr[0] == '#')
646 		{
647 		    while (ptr[0] == '#' && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
648 			ptr = ml_get(--curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
649 		    newindent = get_indent();
650 		}
651 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
652 		if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
653 		    lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE);
654 		else
655 		    lead_len = 0;
656 		if (lead_len > 0)
657 		{
658 		    /*
659 		     * This case gets the following right:
660 		     *	    \*
661 		     *	     * A comment (read '\' as '/').
662 		     *	     *\
663 		     * #define IN_THE_WAY
664 		     *	    This should line up here;
665 		     */
666 		    p = skipwhite(ptr);
667 		    if (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '*')
668 			p++;
669 		    if (p[0] == '*')
670 		    {
671 			for (p++; *p; p++)
672 			{
673 			    if (p[0] == '/' && p[-1] == '*')
674 			    {
675 				/*
676 				 * End of C comment, indent should line up
677 				 * with the line containing the start of
678 				 * the comment
679 				 */
680 				curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
681 				if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
682 				{
683 				    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
684 				    newindent = get_indent();
685 				}
686 			    }
687 			}
688 		    }
689 		}
690 		else	/* Not a comment line */
691 # endif
692 		{
693 		    /* Find last non-blank in line */
694 		    p = ptr + STRLEN(ptr) - 1;
695 		    while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
696 			--p;
697 		    last_char = *p;
698 
699 		    /*
700 		     * find the character just before the '{' or ';'
701 		     */
702 		    if (last_char == '{' || last_char == ';')
703 		    {
704 			if (p > ptr)
705 			    --p;
706 			while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
707 			    --p;
708 		    }
709 		    /*
710 		     * Try to catch lines that are split over multiple
711 		     * lines.  eg:
712 		     *	    if (condition &&
713 		     *			condition) {
714 		     *		Should line up here!
715 		     *	    }
716 		     */
717 		    if (*p == ')')
718 		    {
719 			curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
720 			if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) != NULL)
721 			{
722 			    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
723 			    newindent = get_indent();
724 			    ptr = ml_get_curline();
725 			}
726 		    }
727 		    /*
728 		     * If last character is '{' do indent, without
729 		     * checking for "if" and the like.
730 		     */
731 		    if (last_char == '{')
732 		    {
733 			did_si = TRUE;	/* do indent */
734 			no_si = TRUE;	/* don't delete it when '{' typed */
735 		    }
736 		    /*
737 		     * Look for "if" and the like, use 'cinwords'.
738 		     * Don't do this if the previous line ended in ';' or
739 		     * '}'.
740 		     */
741 		    else if (last_char != ';' && last_char != '}'
742 						       && cin_is_cinword(ptr))
743 			did_si = TRUE;
744 		}
745 	    }
746 	    else /* dir == BACKWARD */
747 	    {
748 		/*
749 		 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
750 		 * recognised as comments.
751 		 */
752 		if (
753 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
754 			lead_len == 0 &&
755 # endif
756 			ptr[0] == '#')
757 		{
758 		    int was_backslashed = FALSE;
759 
760 		    while ((ptr[0] == '#' || was_backslashed) &&
761 			 curwin->w_cursor.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
762 		    {
763 			if (*ptr && ptr[STRLEN(ptr) - 1] == '\\')
764 			    was_backslashed = TRUE;
765 			else
766 			    was_backslashed = FALSE;
767 			ptr = ml_get(++curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
768 		    }
769 		    if (was_backslashed)
770 			newindent = 0;	    /* Got to end of file */
771 		    else
772 			newindent = get_indent();
773 		}
774 		p = skipwhite(ptr);
775 		if (*p == '}')	    /* if line starts with '}': do indent */
776 		    did_si = TRUE;
777 		else		    /* can delete indent when '{' typed */
778 		    can_si_back = TRUE;
779 	    }
780 	    curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
781 	}
782 	if (do_si)
783 	    can_si = TRUE;
784 #endif /* FEAT_SMARTINDENT */
785 
786 	did_ai = TRUE;
787     }
788 
789 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
790     /*
791      * Find out if the current line starts with a comment leader.
792      * This may then be inserted in front of the new line.
793      */
794     end_comment_pending = NUL;
795     if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
796 	lead_len = get_leader_len(saved_line, &lead_flags, dir == BACKWARD);
797     else
798 	lead_len = 0;
799     if (lead_len > 0)
800     {
801 	char_u	*lead_repl = NULL;	    /* replaces comment leader */
802 	int	lead_repl_len = 0;	    /* length of *lead_repl */
803 	char_u	lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN];   /* middle-comment string */
804 	char_u	lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN];	    /* end-comment string */
805 	char_u	*comment_end = NULL;	    /* where lead_end has been found */
806 	int	extra_space = FALSE;	    /* append extra space */
807 	int	current_flag;
808 	int	require_blank = FALSE;	    /* requires blank after middle */
809 	char_u	*p2;
810 
811 	/*
812 	 * If the comment leader has the start, middle or end flag, it may not
813 	 * be used or may be replaced with the middle leader.
814 	 */
815 	for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p)
816 	{
817 	    if (*p == COM_BLANK)
818 	    {
819 		require_blank = TRUE;
820 		continue;
821 	    }
822 	    if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
823 	    {
824 		current_flag = *p;
825 		if (*p == COM_START)
826 		{
827 		    /*
828 		     * Doing "O" on a start of comment does not insert leader.
829 		     */
830 		    if (dir == BACKWARD)
831 		    {
832 			lead_len = 0;
833 			break;
834 		    }
835 
836 		    /* find start of middle part */
837 		    (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
838 		    require_blank = FALSE;
839 		}
840 
841 		/*
842 		 * Isolate the strings of the middle and end leader.
843 		 */
844 		while (*p && p[-1] != ':')	/* find end of middle flags */
845 		{
846 		    if (*p == COM_BLANK)
847 			require_blank = TRUE;
848 		    ++p;
849 		}
850 		(void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
851 
852 		while (*p && p[-1] != ':')	/* find end of end flags */
853 		{
854 		    /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
855 		    if (*p == COM_AUTO_END)
856 			end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
857 		    ++p;
858 		}
859 		n = copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
860 
861 		if (end_comment_pending == -1)	/* we can set it now */
862 		    end_comment_pending = lead_end[n - 1];
863 
864 		/*
865 		 * If the end of the comment is in the same line, don't use
866 		 * the comment leader.
867 		 */
868 		if (dir == FORWARD)
869 		{
870 		    for (p = saved_line + lead_len; *p; ++p)
871 			if (STRNCMP(p, lead_end, n) == 0)
872 			{
873 			    comment_end = p;
874 			    lead_len = 0;
875 			    break;
876 			}
877 		}
878 
879 		/*
880 		 * Doing "o" on a start of comment inserts the middle leader.
881 		 */
882 		if (lead_len > 0)
883 		{
884 		    if (current_flag == COM_START)
885 		    {
886 			lead_repl = lead_middle;
887 			lead_repl_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
888 		    }
889 
890 		    /*
891 		     * If we have hit RETURN immediately after the start
892 		     * comment leader, then put a space after the middle
893 		     * comment leader on the next line.
894 		     */
895 		    if (!vim_iswhite(saved_line[lead_len - 1])
896 			    && ((p_extra != NULL
897 				    && (int)curwin->w_cursor.col == lead_len)
898 				|| (p_extra == NULL
899 				    && saved_line[lead_len] == NUL)
900 				|| require_blank))
901 			extra_space = TRUE;
902 		}
903 		break;
904 	    }
905 	    if (*p == COM_END)
906 	    {
907 		/*
908 		 * Doing "o" on the end of a comment does not insert leader.
909 		 * Remember where the end is, might want to use it to find the
910 		 * start (for C-comments).
911 		 */
912 		if (dir == FORWARD)
913 		{
914 		    comment_end = skipwhite(saved_line);
915 		    lead_len = 0;
916 		    break;
917 		}
918 
919 		/*
920 		 * Doing "O" on the end of a comment inserts the middle leader.
921 		 * Find the string for the middle leader, searching backwards.
922 		 */
923 		while (p > curbuf->b_p_com && *p != ',')
924 		    --p;
925 		for (lead_repl = p; lead_repl > curbuf->b_p_com
926 					 && lead_repl[-1] != ':'; --lead_repl)
927 		    ;
928 		lead_repl_len = (int)(p - lead_repl);
929 
930 		/* We can probably always add an extra space when doing "O" on
931 		 * the comment-end */
932 		extra_space = TRUE;
933 
934 		/* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
935 		for (p2 = p; *p2 && *p2 != ':'; p2++)
936 		{
937 		    if (*p2 == COM_AUTO_END)
938 			end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
939 		}
940 		if (end_comment_pending == -1)
941 		{
942 		    /* Find last character in end-comment string */
943 		    while (*p2 && *p2 != ',')
944 			p2++;
945 		    end_comment_pending = p2[-1];
946 		}
947 		break;
948 	    }
949 	    if (*p == COM_FIRST)
950 	    {
951 		/*
952 		 * Comment leader for first line only:	Don't repeat leader
953 		 * when using "O", blank out leader when using "o".
954 		 */
955 		if (dir == BACKWARD)
956 		    lead_len = 0;
957 		else
958 		{
959 		    lead_repl = (char_u *)"";
960 		    lead_repl_len = 0;
961 		}
962 		break;
963 	    }
964 	}
965 	if (lead_len)
966 	{
967 	    /* allocate buffer (may concatenate p_exta later) */
968 	    leader = alloc(lead_len + lead_repl_len + extra_space +
969 							      extra_len + 1);
970 	    allocated = leader;		    /* remember to free it later */
971 
972 	    if (leader == NULL)
973 		lead_len = 0;
974 	    else
975 	    {
976 		vim_strncpy(leader, saved_line, lead_len);
977 
978 		/*
979 		 * Replace leader with lead_repl, right or left adjusted
980 		 */
981 		if (lead_repl != NULL)
982 		{
983 		    int		c = 0;
984 		    int		off = 0;
985 
986 		    for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p)
987 		    {
988 			if (*p == COM_RIGHT || *p == COM_LEFT)
989 			    c = *p;
990 			else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
991 			    off = getdigits(&p);
992 		    }
993 		    if (c == COM_RIGHT)    /* right adjusted leader */
994 		    {
995 			/* find last non-white in the leader to line up with */
996 			for (p = leader + lead_len - 1; p > leader
997 						      && vim_iswhite(*p); --p)
998 			    ;
999 			++p;
1000 
1001 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1002 			/* Compute the length of the replaced characters in
1003 			 * screen characters, not bytes. */
1004 			{
1005 			    int	    repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl,
1006 							       lead_repl_len);
1007 			    int	    old_size = 0;
1008 			    char_u  *endp = p;
1009 			    int	    l;
1010 
1011 			    while (old_size < repl_size && p > leader)
1012 			    {
1013 				mb_ptr_back(leader, p);
1014 				old_size += ptr2cells(p);
1015 			    }
1016 			    l = lead_repl_len - (endp - p);
1017 			    if (l != 0)
1018 				mch_memmove(endp + l, endp,
1019 					(size_t)((leader + lead_len) - endp));
1020 			    lead_len += l;
1021 			}
1022 #else
1023 			if (p < leader + lead_repl_len)
1024 			    p = leader;
1025 			else
1026 			    p -= lead_repl_len;
1027 #endif
1028 			mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
1029 			if (p + lead_repl_len > leader + lead_len)
1030 			    p[lead_repl_len] = NUL;
1031 
1032 			/* blank-out any other chars from the old leader. */
1033 			while (--p >= leader)
1034 			{
1035 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1036 			    int l = mb_head_off(leader, p);
1037 
1038 			    if (l > 1)
1039 			    {
1040 				p -= l;
1041 				if (ptr2cells(p) > 1)
1042 				{
1043 				    p[1] = ' ';
1044 				    --l;
1045 				}
1046 				mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l + 1,
1047 				   (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - (p + l + 1)));
1048 				lead_len -= l;
1049 				*p = ' ';
1050 			    }
1051 			    else
1052 #endif
1053 			    if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
1054 				*p = ' ';
1055 			}
1056 		    }
1057 		    else		    /* left adjusted leader */
1058 		    {
1059 			p = skipwhite(leader);
1060 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1061 			/* Compute the length of the replaced characters in
1062 			 * screen characters, not bytes. Move the part that is
1063 			 * not to be overwritten. */
1064 			{
1065 			    int	    repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl,
1066 							       lead_repl_len);
1067 			    int	    i;
1068 			    int	    l;
1069 
1070 			    for (i = 0; p[i] != NUL && i < lead_len; i += l)
1071 			    {
1072 				l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p + i);
1073 				if (vim_strnsize(p, i + l) > repl_size)
1074 				    break;
1075 			    }
1076 			    if (i != lead_repl_len)
1077 			    {
1078 				mch_memmove(p + lead_repl_len, p + i,
1079 				       (size_t)(lead_len - i - (leader - p)));
1080 				lead_len += lead_repl_len - i;
1081 			    }
1082 			}
1083 #endif
1084 			mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
1085 
1086 			/* Replace any remaining non-white chars in the old
1087 			 * leader by spaces.  Keep Tabs, the indent must
1088 			 * remain the same. */
1089 			for (p += lead_repl_len; p < leader + lead_len; ++p)
1090 			    if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
1091 			    {
1092 				/* Don't put a space before a TAB. */
1093 				if (p + 1 < leader + lead_len && p[1] == TAB)
1094 				{
1095 				    --lead_len;
1096 				    mch_memmove(p, p + 1,
1097 						     (leader + lead_len) - p);
1098 				}
1099 				else
1100 				{
1101 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1102 				    int	    l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p);
1103 
1104 				    if (l > 1)
1105 				    {
1106 					if (ptr2cells(p) > 1)
1107 					{
1108 					    /* Replace a double-wide char with
1109 					     * two spaces */
1110 					    --l;
1111 					    *p++ = ' ';
1112 					}
1113 					mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l,
1114 						     (leader + lead_len) - p);
1115 					lead_len -= l - 1;
1116 				    }
1117 #endif
1118 				    *p = ' ';
1119 				}
1120 			    }
1121 			*p = NUL;
1122 		    }
1123 
1124 		    /* Recompute the indent, it may have changed. */
1125 		    if (curbuf->b_p_ai
1126 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1127 					|| do_si
1128 #endif
1129 							   )
1130 			newindent = get_indent_str(leader, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
1131 
1132 		    /* Add the indent offset */
1133 		    if (newindent + off < 0)
1134 		    {
1135 			off = -newindent;
1136 			newindent = 0;
1137 		    }
1138 		    else
1139 			newindent += off;
1140 
1141 		    /* Correct trailing spaces for the shift, so that
1142 		     * alignment remains equal. */
1143 		    while (off > 0 && lead_len > 0
1144 					       && leader[lead_len - 1] == ' ')
1145 		    {
1146 			/* Don't do it when there is a tab before the space */
1147 			if (vim_strchr(skipwhite(leader), '\t') != NULL)
1148 			    break;
1149 			--lead_len;
1150 			--off;
1151 		    }
1152 
1153 		    /* If the leader ends in white space, don't add an
1154 		     * extra space */
1155 		    if (lead_len > 0 && vim_iswhite(leader[lead_len - 1]))
1156 			extra_space = FALSE;
1157 		    leader[lead_len] = NUL;
1158 		}
1159 
1160 		if (extra_space)
1161 		{
1162 		    leader[lead_len++] = ' ';
1163 		    leader[lead_len] = NUL;
1164 		}
1165 
1166 		newcol = lead_len;
1167 
1168 		/*
1169 		 * if a new indent will be set below, remove the indent that
1170 		 * is in the comment leader
1171 		 */
1172 		if (newindent
1173 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1174 				|| did_si
1175 #endif
1176 					   )
1177 		{
1178 		    while (lead_len && vim_iswhite(*leader))
1179 		    {
1180 			--lead_len;
1181 			--newcol;
1182 			++leader;
1183 		    }
1184 		}
1185 
1186 	    }
1187 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1188 	    did_si = can_si = FALSE;
1189 #endif
1190 	}
1191 	else if (comment_end != NULL)
1192 	{
1193 	    /*
1194 	     * We have finished a comment, so we don't use the leader.
1195 	     * If this was a C-comment and 'ai' or 'si' is set do a normal
1196 	     * indent to align with the line containing the start of the
1197 	     * comment.
1198 	     */
1199 	    if (comment_end[0] == '*' && comment_end[1] == '/' &&
1200 			(curbuf->b_p_ai
1201 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1202 					|| do_si
1203 #endif
1204 							   ))
1205 	    {
1206 		old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
1207 		curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(comment_end - saved_line);
1208 		if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
1209 		{
1210 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
1211 		    newindent = get_indent();
1212 		}
1213 		curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
1214 	    }
1215 	}
1216     }
1217 #endif
1218 
1219     /* (State == INSERT || State == REPLACE), only when dir == FORWARD */
1220     if (p_extra != NULL)
1221     {
1222 	*p_extra = saved_char;		/* restore char that NUL replaced */
1223 
1224 	/*
1225 	 * When 'ai' set or "flags" has OPENLINE_DELSPACES, skip to the first
1226 	 * non-blank.
1227 	 *
1228 	 * When in REPLACE mode, put the deleted blanks on the replace stack,
1229 	 * preceded by a NUL, so they can be put back when a BS is entered.
1230 	 */
1231 	if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1232 	    replace_push(NUL);	    /* end of extra blanks */
1233 	if (curbuf->b_p_ai || (flags & OPENLINE_DELSPACES))
1234 	{
1235 	    while ((*p_extra == ' ' || *p_extra == '\t')
1236 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1237 		    && (!enc_utf8
1238 			       || !utf_iscomposing(utf_ptr2char(p_extra + 1)))
1239 #endif
1240 		    )
1241 	    {
1242 		if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1243 		    replace_push(*p_extra);
1244 		++p_extra;
1245 		++less_cols_off;
1246 	    }
1247 	}
1248 	if (*p_extra != NUL)
1249 	    did_ai = FALSE;	    /* append some text, don't truncate now */
1250 
1251 	/* columns for marks adjusted for removed columns */
1252 	less_cols = (int)(p_extra - saved_line);
1253     }
1254 
1255     if (p_extra == NULL)
1256 	p_extra = (char_u *)"";		    /* append empty line */
1257 
1258 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1259     /* concatenate leader and p_extra, if there is a leader */
1260     if (lead_len)
1261     {
1262 	STRCAT(leader, p_extra);
1263 	p_extra = leader;
1264 	did_ai = TRUE;	    /* So truncating blanks works with comments */
1265 	less_cols -= lead_len;
1266     }
1267     else
1268 	end_comment_pending = NUL;  /* turns out there was no leader */
1269 #endif
1270 
1271     old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
1272     if (dir == BACKWARD)
1273 	--curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1274 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1275     if (!(State & VREPLACE_FLAG) || old_cursor.lnum >= orig_line_count)
1276 #endif
1277     {
1278 	if (ml_append(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, (colnr_T)0, FALSE)
1279 								      == FAIL)
1280 	    goto theend;
1281 	/* Postpone calling changed_lines(), because it would mess up folding
1282 	 * with markers. */
1283 	mark_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, 1L, 0L);
1284 	did_append = TRUE;
1285     }
1286 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1287     else
1288     {
1289 	/*
1290 	 * In VREPLACE mode we are starting to replace the next line.
1291 	 */
1292 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum++;
1293 	if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= Insstart.lnum + vr_lines_changed)
1294 	{
1295 	    /* In case we NL to a new line, BS to the previous one, and NL
1296 	     * again, we don't want to save the new line for undo twice.
1297 	     */
1298 	    (void)u_save_cursor();		    /* errors are ignored! */
1299 	    vr_lines_changed++;
1300 	}
1301 	ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, TRUE);
1302 	changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
1303 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
1304 	did_append = FALSE;
1305     }
1306 #endif
1307 
1308     if (newindent
1309 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1310 		    || did_si
1311 #endif
1312 				)
1313     {
1314 	++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1315 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1316 	if (did_si)
1317 	{
1318 	    if (p_sr)
1319 		newindent -= newindent % (int)curbuf->b_p_sw;
1320 	    newindent += (int)curbuf->b_p_sw;
1321 	}
1322 #endif
1323 	/* Copy the indent only if expand tab is disabled */
1324 	if (curbuf->b_p_ci && !curbuf->b_p_et)
1325 	{
1326 	    (void)copy_indent(newindent, saved_line);
1327 
1328 	    /*
1329 	     * Set the 'preserveindent' option so that any further screwing
1330 	     * with the line doesn't entirely destroy our efforts to preserve
1331 	     * it.  It gets restored at the function end.
1332 	     */
1333 	    curbuf->b_p_pi = TRUE;
1334 	}
1335 	else
1336 	    (void)set_indent(newindent, SIN_INSERT);
1337 	less_cols -= curwin->w_cursor.col;
1338 
1339 	ai_col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1340 
1341 	/*
1342 	 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the new indent, there must
1343 	 * be a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS
1344 	 */
1345 	if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1346 	    for (n = 0; n < (int)curwin->w_cursor.col; ++n)
1347 		replace_push(NUL);
1348 	newcol += curwin->w_cursor.col;
1349 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1350 	if (no_si)
1351 	    did_si = FALSE;
1352 #endif
1353     }
1354 
1355 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1356     /*
1357      * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the extra leader, there must be
1358      * a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS.
1359      */
1360     if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1361 	while (lead_len-- > 0)
1362 	    replace_push(NUL);
1363 #endif
1364 
1365     curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
1366 
1367     if (dir == FORWARD)
1368     {
1369 	if (trunc_line || (State & INSERT))
1370 	{
1371 	    /* truncate current line at cursor */
1372 	    saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
1373 	    /* Remove trailing white space, unless OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL used. */
1374 	    if (trunc_line && !(flags & OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL))
1375 		truncate_spaces(saved_line);
1376 	    ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, saved_line, FALSE);
1377 	    saved_line = NULL;
1378 	    if (did_append)
1379 	    {
1380 		changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col,
1381 					       curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, 1L);
1382 		did_append = FALSE;
1383 
1384 		/* Move marks after the line break to the new line. */
1385 		if (flags & OPENLINE_MARKFIX)
1386 		    mark_col_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
1387 					 curwin->w_cursor.col + less_cols_off,
1388 							1L, (long)-less_cols);
1389 	    }
1390 	    else
1391 		changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
1392 	}
1393 
1394 	/*
1395 	 * Put the cursor on the new line.  Careful: the scrollup() above may
1396 	 * have moved w_cursor, we must use old_cursor.
1397 	 */
1398 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum = old_cursor.lnum + 1;
1399     }
1400     if (did_append)
1401 	changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 1L);
1402 
1403     curwin->w_cursor.col = newcol;
1404 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1405     curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
1406 #endif
1407 
1408 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
1409     /*
1410      * In VREPLACE mode, we are handling the replace stack ourselves, so stop
1411      * fixthisline() from doing it (via change_indent()) by telling it we're in
1412      * normal INSERT mode.
1413      */
1414     if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1415     {
1416 	vreplace_mode = State;	/* So we know to put things right later */
1417 	State = INSERT;
1418     }
1419     else
1420 	vreplace_mode = 0;
1421 #endif
1422 #ifdef FEAT_LISP
1423     /*
1424      * May do lisp indenting.
1425      */
1426     if (!p_paste
1427 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1428 	    && leader == NULL
1429 # endif
1430 	    && curbuf->b_p_lisp
1431 	    && curbuf->b_p_ai)
1432     {
1433 	fixthisline(get_lisp_indent);
1434 	p = ml_get_curline();
1435 	ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
1436     }
1437 #endif
1438 #ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
1439     /*
1440      * May do indenting after opening a new line.
1441      */
1442     if (!p_paste
1443 	    && (curbuf->b_p_cin
1444 #  ifdef FEAT_EVAL
1445 		    || *curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL
1446 #  endif
1447 		)
1448 	    && in_cinkeys(dir == FORWARD
1449 		? KEY_OPEN_FORW
1450 		: KEY_OPEN_BACK, ' ', linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum)))
1451     {
1452 	do_c_expr_indent();
1453 	p = ml_get_curline();
1454 	ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
1455     }
1456 #endif
1457 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
1458     if (vreplace_mode != 0)
1459 	State = vreplace_mode;
1460 #endif
1461 
1462 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1463     /*
1464      * Finally, VREPLACE gets the stuff on the new line, then puts back the
1465      * original line, and inserts the new stuff char by char, pushing old stuff
1466      * onto the replace stack (via ins_char()).
1467      */
1468     if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1469     {
1470 	/* Put new line in p_extra */
1471 	p_extra = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
1472 	if (p_extra == NULL)
1473 	    goto theend;
1474 
1475 	/* Put back original line */
1476 	ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, next_line, FALSE);
1477 
1478 	/* Insert new stuff into line again */
1479 	curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
1480 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1481 	curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
1482 #endif
1483 	ins_bytes(p_extra);	/* will call changed_bytes() */
1484 	vim_free(p_extra);
1485 	next_line = NULL;
1486     }
1487 #endif
1488 
1489     retval = TRUE;		/* success! */
1490 theend:
1491     curbuf->b_p_pi = saved_pi;
1492     vim_free(saved_line);
1493     vim_free(next_line);
1494     vim_free(allocated);
1495     return retval;
1496 }
1497 
1498 #if defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(PROTO)
1499 /*
1500  * get_leader_len() returns the length of the prefix of the given string
1501  * which introduces a comment.	If this string is not a comment then 0 is
1502  * returned.
1503  * When "flags" is not NULL, it is set to point to the flags of the recognized
1504  * comment leader.
1505  * "backward" must be true for the "O" command.
1506  */
1507     int
1508 get_leader_len(line, flags, backward)
1509     char_u	*line;
1510     char_u	**flags;
1511     int		backward;
1512 {
1513     int		i, j;
1514     int		got_com = FALSE;
1515     int		found_one;
1516     char_u	part_buf[COM_MAX_LEN];	/* buffer for one option part */
1517     char_u	*string;		/* pointer to comment string */
1518     char_u	*list;
1519 
1520     i = 0;
1521     while (vim_iswhite(line[i]))    /* leading white space is ignored */
1522 	++i;
1523 
1524     /*
1525      * Repeat to match several nested comment strings.
1526      */
1527     while (line[i])
1528     {
1529 	/*
1530 	 * scan through the 'comments' option for a match
1531 	 */
1532 	found_one = FALSE;
1533 	for (list = curbuf->b_p_com; *list; )
1534 	{
1535 	    /*
1536 	     * Get one option part into part_buf[].  Advance list to next one.
1537 	     * put string at start of string.
1538 	     */
1539 	    if (!got_com && flags != NULL)  /* remember where flags started */
1540 		*flags = list;
1541 	    (void)copy_option_part(&list, part_buf, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
1542 	    string = vim_strchr(part_buf, ':');
1543 	    if (string == NULL)	    /* missing ':', ignore this part */
1544 		continue;
1545 	    *string++ = NUL;	    /* isolate flags from string */
1546 
1547 	    /*
1548 	     * When already found a nested comment, only accept further
1549 	     * nested comments.
1550 	     */
1551 	    if (got_com && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
1552 		continue;
1553 
1554 	    /* When 'O' flag used don't use for "O" command */
1555 	    if (backward && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NOBACK) != NULL)
1556 		continue;
1557 
1558 	    /*
1559 	     * Line contents and string must match.
1560 	     * When string starts with white space, must have some white space
1561 	     * (but the amount does not need to match, there might be a mix of
1562 	     * TABs and spaces).
1563 	     */
1564 	    if (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
1565 	    {
1566 		if (i == 0 || !vim_iswhite(line[i - 1]))
1567 		    continue;
1568 		while (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
1569 		    ++string;
1570 	    }
1571 	    for (j = 0; string[j] != NUL && string[j] == line[i + j]; ++j)
1572 		;
1573 	    if (string[j] != NUL)
1574 		continue;
1575 
1576 	    /*
1577 	     * When 'b' flag used, there must be white space or an
1578 	     * end-of-line after the string in the line.
1579 	     */
1580 	    if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_BLANK) != NULL
1581 			   && !vim_iswhite(line[i + j]) && line[i + j] != NUL)
1582 		continue;
1583 
1584 	    /*
1585 	     * We have found a match, stop searching.
1586 	     */
1587 	    i += j;
1588 	    got_com = TRUE;
1589 	    found_one = TRUE;
1590 	    break;
1591 	}
1592 
1593 	/*
1594 	 * No match found, stop scanning.
1595 	 */
1596 	if (!found_one)
1597 	    break;
1598 
1599 	/*
1600 	 * Include any trailing white space.
1601 	 */
1602 	while (vim_iswhite(line[i]))
1603 	    ++i;
1604 
1605 	/*
1606 	 * If this comment doesn't nest, stop here.
1607 	 */
1608 	if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
1609 	    break;
1610     }
1611     return (got_com ? i : 0);
1612 }
1613 #endif
1614 
1615 /*
1616  * Return the number of window lines occupied by buffer line "lnum".
1617  */
1618     int
1619 plines(lnum)
1620     linenr_T	lnum;
1621 {
1622     return plines_win(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
1623 }
1624 
1625     int
1626 plines_win(wp, lnum, winheight)
1627     win_T	*wp;
1628     linenr_T	lnum;
1629     int		winheight;	/* when TRUE limit to window height */
1630 {
1631 #if defined(FEAT_DIFF) || defined(PROTO)
1632     /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line.  When folded the result
1633      * is one line anyway. */
1634     return plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight) + diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
1635 }
1636 
1637     int
1638 plines_nofill(lnum)
1639     linenr_T	lnum;
1640 {
1641     return plines_win_nofill(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
1642 }
1643 
1644     int
1645 plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight)
1646     win_T	*wp;
1647     linenr_T	lnum;
1648     int		winheight;	/* when TRUE limit to window height */
1649 {
1650 #endif
1651     int		lines;
1652 
1653     if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
1654 	return 1;
1655 
1656 #ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
1657     if (wp->w_width == 0)
1658 	return 1;
1659 #endif
1660 
1661 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
1662     /* A folded lines is handled just like an empty line. */
1663     /* NOTE: Caller must handle lines that are MAYBE folded. */
1664     if (lineFolded(wp, lnum) == TRUE)
1665 	return 1;
1666 #endif
1667 
1668     lines = plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum);
1669     if (winheight > 0 && lines > wp->w_height)
1670 	return (int)wp->w_height;
1671     return lines;
1672 }
1673 
1674 /*
1675  * Return number of window lines physical line "lnum" will occupy in window
1676  * "wp".  Does not care about folding, 'wrap' or 'diff'.
1677  */
1678     int
1679 plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum)
1680     win_T	*wp;
1681     linenr_T	lnum;
1682 {
1683     char_u	*s;
1684     long	col;
1685     int		width;
1686 
1687     s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
1688     if (*s == NUL)		/* empty line */
1689 	return 1;
1690     col = win_linetabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)MAXCOL);
1691 
1692     /*
1693      * If list mode is on, then the '$' at the end of the line may take up one
1694      * extra column.
1695      */
1696     if (wp->w_p_list && lcs_eol != NUL)
1697 	col += 1;
1698 
1699     /*
1700      * Add column offset for 'number' and 'foldcolumn'.
1701      */
1702     width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
1703     if (width <= 0)
1704 	return 32000;
1705     if (col <= width)
1706 	return 1;
1707     col -= width;
1708     width += win_col_off2(wp);
1709     return (col + (width - 1)) / width + 1;
1710 }
1711 
1712 /*
1713  * Like plines_win(), but only reports the number of physical screen lines
1714  * used from the start of the line to the given column number.
1715  */
1716     int
1717 plines_win_col(wp, lnum, column)
1718     win_T	*wp;
1719     linenr_T	lnum;
1720     long	column;
1721 {
1722     long	col;
1723     char_u	*s;
1724     int		lines = 0;
1725     int		width;
1726 
1727 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF
1728     /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line.  When folded the result
1729      * is one line anyway. */
1730     lines = diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
1731 #endif
1732 
1733     if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
1734 	return lines + 1;
1735 
1736 #ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
1737     if (wp->w_width == 0)
1738 	return lines + 1;
1739 #endif
1740 
1741     s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
1742 
1743     col = 0;
1744     while (*s != NUL && --column >= 0)
1745     {
1746 	col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL);
1747 	mb_ptr_adv(s);
1748     }
1749 
1750     /*
1751      * If *s is a TAB, and the TAB is not displayed as ^I, and we're not in
1752      * INSERT mode, then col must be adjusted so that it represents the last
1753      * screen position of the TAB.  This only fixes an error when the TAB wraps
1754      * from one screen line to the next (when 'columns' is not a multiple of
1755      * 'ts') -- webb.
1756      */
1757     if (*s == TAB && (State & NORMAL) && (!wp->w_p_list || lcs_tab1))
1758 	col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL) - 1;
1759 
1760     /*
1761      * Add column offset for 'number', 'foldcolumn', etc.
1762      */
1763     width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
1764     if (width > 0)
1765     {
1766 	lines += 1;
1767 	if (col >= width)
1768 	    lines += (col - width) / (width + win_col_off2(wp));
1769 	if (lines <= wp->w_height)
1770 	    return lines;
1771     }
1772     return (int)(wp->w_height);	    /* maximum length */
1773 }
1774 
1775     int
1776 plines_m_win(wp, first, last)
1777     win_T	*wp;
1778     linenr_T	first, last;
1779 {
1780     int		count = 0;
1781 
1782     while (first <= last)
1783     {
1784 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
1785 	int	x;
1786 
1787 	/* Check if there are any really folded lines, but also included lines
1788 	 * that are maybe folded. */
1789 	x = foldedCount(wp, first, NULL);
1790 	if (x > 0)
1791 	{
1792 	    ++count;	    /* count 1 for "+-- folded" line */
1793 	    first += x;
1794 	}
1795 	else
1796 #endif
1797 	{
1798 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF
1799 	    if (first == wp->w_topline)
1800 		count += plines_win_nofill(wp, first, TRUE) + wp->w_topfill;
1801 	    else
1802 #endif
1803 		count += plines_win(wp, first, TRUE);
1804 	    ++first;
1805 	}
1806     }
1807     return (count);
1808 }
1809 
1810 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) || defined(PROTO)
1811 /*
1812  * Insert string "p" at the cursor position.  Stops at a NUL byte.
1813  * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
1814  */
1815     void
1816 ins_bytes(p)
1817     char_u	*p;
1818 {
1819     ins_bytes_len(p, (int)STRLEN(p));
1820 }
1821 #endif
1822 
1823 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) \
1824 	|| defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
1825 /*
1826  * Insert string "p" with length "len" at the cursor position.
1827  * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
1828  */
1829     void
1830 ins_bytes_len(p, len)
1831     char_u	*p;
1832     int		len;
1833 {
1834     int		i;
1835 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1836     int		n;
1837 
1838     for (i = 0; i < len; i += n)
1839     {
1840 	n = (*mb_ptr2len)(p + i);
1841 	ins_char_bytes(p + i, n);
1842     }
1843 # else
1844     for (i = 0; i < len; ++i)
1845 	ins_char(p[i]);
1846 # endif
1847 }
1848 #endif
1849 
1850 /*
1851  * Insert or replace a single character at the cursor position.
1852  * When in REPLACE or VREPLACE mode, replace any existing character.
1853  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
1854  * For multi-byte characters we get the whole character, the caller must
1855  * convert bytes to a character.
1856  */
1857     void
1858 ins_char(c)
1859     int		c;
1860 {
1861 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
1862     char_u	buf[MB_MAXBYTES];
1863     int		n;
1864 
1865     n = (*mb_char2bytes)(c, buf);
1866 
1867     /* When "c" is 0x100, 0x200, etc. we don't want to insert a NUL byte.
1868      * Happens for CTRL-Vu9900. */
1869     if (buf[0] == 0)
1870 	buf[0] = '\n';
1871 
1872     ins_char_bytes(buf, n);
1873 }
1874 
1875     void
1876 ins_char_bytes(buf, charlen)
1877     char_u	*buf;
1878     int		charlen;
1879 {
1880     int		c = buf[0];
1881     int		l, j;
1882 #endif
1883     int		newlen;		/* nr of bytes inserted */
1884     int		oldlen;		/* nr of bytes deleted (0 when not replacing) */
1885     char_u	*p;
1886     char_u	*newp;
1887     char_u	*oldp;
1888     int		linelen;	/* length of old line including NUL */
1889     colnr_T	col;
1890     linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1891     int		i;
1892 
1893 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1894     /* Break tabs if needed. */
1895     if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
1896 	coladvance_force(getviscol());
1897 #endif
1898 
1899     col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1900     oldp = ml_get(lnum);
1901     linelen = (int)STRLEN(oldp) + 1;
1902 
1903     /* The lengths default to the values for when not replacing. */
1904     oldlen = 0;
1905 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1906     newlen = charlen;
1907 #else
1908     newlen = 1;
1909 #endif
1910 
1911     if (State & REPLACE_FLAG)
1912     {
1913 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1914 	if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1915 	{
1916 	    colnr_T	new_vcol = 0;   /* init for GCC */
1917 	    colnr_T	vcol;
1918 	    int		old_list;
1919 #ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
1920 	    char_u	buf[2];
1921 #endif
1922 
1923 	    /*
1924 	     * Disable 'list' temporarily, unless 'cpo' contains the 'L' flag.
1925 	     * Returns the old value of list, so when finished,
1926 	     * curwin->w_p_list should be set back to this.
1927 	     */
1928 	    old_list = curwin->w_p_list;
1929 	    if (old_list && vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISTWM) == NULL)
1930 		curwin->w_p_list = FALSE;
1931 
1932 	    /*
1933 	     * In virtual replace mode each character may replace one or more
1934 	     * characters (zero if it's a TAB).  Count the number of bytes to
1935 	     * be deleted to make room for the new character, counting screen
1936 	     * cells.  May result in adding spaces to fill a gap.
1937 	     */
1938 	    getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, NULL, &vcol, NULL);
1939 #ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
1940 	    buf[0] = c;
1941 	    buf[1] = NUL;
1942 #endif
1943 	    new_vcol = vcol + chartabsize(buf, vcol);
1944 	    while (oldp[col + oldlen] != NUL && vcol < new_vcol)
1945 	    {
1946 		vcol += chartabsize(oldp + col + oldlen, vcol);
1947 		/* Don't need to remove a TAB that takes us to the right
1948 		 * position. */
1949 		if (vcol > new_vcol && oldp[col + oldlen] == TAB)
1950 		    break;
1951 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1952 		oldlen += (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col + oldlen);
1953 #else
1954 		++oldlen;
1955 #endif
1956 		/* Deleted a bit too much, insert spaces. */
1957 		if (vcol > new_vcol)
1958 		    newlen += vcol - new_vcol;
1959 	    }
1960 	    curwin->w_p_list = old_list;
1961 	}
1962 	else
1963 #endif
1964 	    if (oldp[col] != NUL)
1965 	{
1966 	    /* normal replace */
1967 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1968 	    oldlen = (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col);
1969 #else
1970 	    oldlen = 1;
1971 #endif
1972 	}
1973 
1974 
1975 	/* Push the replaced bytes onto the replace stack, so that they can be
1976 	 * put back when BS is used.  The bytes of a multi-byte character are
1977 	 * done the other way around, so that the first byte is popped off
1978 	 * first (it tells the byte length of the character). */
1979 	replace_push(NUL);
1980 	for (i = 0; i < oldlen; ++i)
1981 	{
1982 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1983 	    l = (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col + i) - 1;
1984 	    for (j = l; j >= 0; --j)
1985 		replace_push(oldp[col + i + j]);
1986 	    i += l;
1987 #else
1988 	    replace_push(oldp[col + i]);
1989 #endif
1990 	}
1991     }
1992 
1993     newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(linelen + newlen - oldlen));
1994     if (newp == NULL)
1995 	return;
1996 
1997     /* Copy bytes before the cursor. */
1998     if (col > 0)
1999 	mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2000 
2001     /* Copy bytes after the changed character(s). */
2002     p = newp + col;
2003     mch_memmove(p + newlen, oldp + col + oldlen,
2004 					    (size_t)(linelen - col - oldlen));
2005 
2006     /* Insert or overwrite the new character. */
2007 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2008     mch_memmove(p, buf, charlen);
2009     i = charlen;
2010 #else
2011     *p = c;
2012     i = 1;
2013 #endif
2014 
2015     /* Fill with spaces when necessary. */
2016     while (i < newlen)
2017 	p[i++] = ' ';
2018 
2019     /* Replace the line in the buffer. */
2020     ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2021 
2022     /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2023     changed_bytes(lnum, col);
2024 
2025     /*
2026      * If we're in Insert or Replace mode and 'showmatch' is set, then briefly
2027      * show the match for right parens and braces.
2028      */
2029     if (p_sm && (State & INSERT)
2030 	    && msg_silent == 0
2031 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2032 	    && charlen == 1
2033 #endif
2034 #ifdef FEAT_INS_EXPAND
2035 	    && !ins_compl_active()
2036 #endif
2037        )
2038 	showmatch(c);
2039 
2040 #ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT
2041     if (!p_ri || (State & REPLACE_FLAG))
2042 #endif
2043     {
2044 	/* Normal insert: move cursor right */
2045 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2046 	curwin->w_cursor.col += charlen;
2047 #else
2048 	++curwin->w_cursor.col;
2049 #endif
2050     }
2051     /*
2052      * TODO: should try to update w_row here, to avoid recomputing it later.
2053      */
2054 }
2055 
2056 /*
2057  * Insert a string at the cursor position.
2058  * Note: Does NOT handle Replace mode.
2059  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2060  */
2061     void
2062 ins_str(s)
2063     char_u	*s;
2064 {
2065     char_u	*oldp, *newp;
2066     int		newlen = (int)STRLEN(s);
2067     int		oldlen;
2068     colnr_T	col;
2069     linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2070 
2071 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2072     if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
2073 	coladvance_force(getviscol());
2074 #endif
2075 
2076     col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2077     oldp = ml_get(lnum);
2078     oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);
2079 
2080     newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(oldlen + newlen + 1));
2081     if (newp == NULL)
2082 	return;
2083     if (col > 0)
2084 	mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2085     mch_memmove(newp + col, s, (size_t)newlen);
2086     mch_memmove(newp + col + newlen, oldp + col, (size_t)(oldlen - col + 1));
2087     ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2088     changed_bytes(lnum, col);
2089     curwin->w_cursor.col += newlen;
2090 }
2091 
2092 /*
2093  * Delete one character under the cursor.
2094  * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
2095  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2096  *
2097  * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2098  */
2099     int
2100 del_char(fixpos)
2101     int		fixpos;
2102 {
2103 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2104     if (has_mbyte)
2105     {
2106 	/* Make sure the cursor is at the start of a character. */
2107 	mb_adjust_cursor();
2108 	if (*ml_get_cursor() == NUL)
2109 	    return FAIL;
2110 	return del_chars(1L, fixpos);
2111     }
2112 #endif
2113     return del_bytes(1L, fixpos, TRUE);
2114 }
2115 
2116 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
2117 /*
2118  * Like del_bytes(), but delete characters instead of bytes.
2119  */
2120     int
2121 del_chars(count, fixpos)
2122     long	count;
2123     int		fixpos;
2124 {
2125     long	bytes = 0;
2126     long	i;
2127     char_u	*p;
2128     int		l;
2129 
2130     p = ml_get_cursor();
2131     for (i = 0; i < count && *p != NUL; ++i)
2132     {
2133 	l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p);
2134 	bytes += l;
2135 	p += l;
2136     }
2137     return del_bytes(bytes, fixpos, TRUE);
2138 }
2139 #endif
2140 
2141 /*
2142  * Delete "count" bytes under the cursor.
2143  * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
2144  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2145  *
2146  * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2147  */
2148 /*ARGSUSED*/
2149     int
2150 del_bytes(count, fixpos_arg, use_delcombine)
2151     long	count;
2152     int		fixpos_arg;
2153     int		use_delcombine;	    /* 'delcombine' option applies */
2154 {
2155     char_u	*oldp, *newp;
2156     colnr_T	oldlen;
2157     linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2158     colnr_T	col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2159     int		was_alloced;
2160     long	movelen;
2161     int		fixpos = fixpos_arg;
2162 
2163     oldp = ml_get(lnum);
2164     oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);
2165 
2166     /*
2167      * Can't do anything when the cursor is on the NUL after the line.
2168      */
2169     if (col >= oldlen)
2170 	return FAIL;
2171 
2172 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2173     /* If 'delcombine' is set and deleting (less than) one character, only
2174      * delete the last combining character. */
2175     if (p_deco && use_delcombine && enc_utf8
2176 					 && utfc_ptr2len(oldp + col) >= count)
2177     {
2178 	int	cc[MAX_MCO];
2179 	int	n;
2180 
2181 	(void)utfc_ptr2char(oldp + col, cc);
2182 	if (cc[0] != NUL)
2183 	{
2184 	    /* Find the last composing char, there can be several. */
2185 	    n = col;
2186 	    do
2187 	    {
2188 		col = n;
2189 		count = utf_ptr2len(oldp + n);
2190 		n += count;
2191 	    } while (UTF_COMPOSINGLIKE(oldp + col, oldp + n));
2192 	    fixpos = 0;
2193 	}
2194     }
2195 #endif
2196 
2197     /*
2198      * When count is too big, reduce it.
2199      */
2200     movelen = (long)oldlen - (long)col - count + 1; /* includes trailing NUL */
2201     if (movelen <= 1)
2202     {
2203 	/*
2204 	 * If we just took off the last character of a non-blank line, and
2205 	 * fixpos is TRUE, we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL,
2206 	 * unless "restart_edit" is set or 'virtualedit' contains "onemore".
2207 	 */
2208 	if (col > 0 && fixpos && restart_edit == 0
2209 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2210 					      && (ve_flags & VE_ONEMORE) == 0
2211 #endif
2212 					      )
2213 	{
2214 	    --curwin->w_cursor.col;
2215 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2216 	    curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
2217 #endif
2218 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2219 	    if (has_mbyte)
2220 		curwin->w_cursor.col -=
2221 			    (*mb_head_off)(oldp, oldp + curwin->w_cursor.col);
2222 #endif
2223 	}
2224 	count = oldlen - col;
2225 	movelen = 1;
2226     }
2227 
2228     /*
2229      * If the old line has been allocated the deletion can be done in the
2230      * existing line. Otherwise a new line has to be allocated
2231      */
2232     was_alloced = ml_line_alloced();	    /* check if oldp was allocated */
2233 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
2234     if (was_alloced && usingNetbeans)
2235 	netbeans_removed(curbuf, lnum, col, count);
2236     /* else is handled by ml_replace() */
2237 #endif
2238     if (was_alloced)
2239 	newp = oldp;			    /* use same allocated memory */
2240     else
2241     {					    /* need to allocate a new line */
2242 	newp = alloc((unsigned)(oldlen + 1 - count));
2243 	if (newp == NULL)
2244 	    return FAIL;
2245 	mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2246     }
2247     mch_memmove(newp + col, oldp + col + count, (size_t)movelen);
2248     if (!was_alloced)
2249 	ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2250 
2251     /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2252     changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
2253 
2254     return OK;
2255 }
2256 
2257 /*
2258  * Delete from cursor to end of line.
2259  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2260  *
2261  * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2262  */
2263     int
2264 truncate_line(fixpos)
2265     int		fixpos;	    /* if TRUE fix the cursor position when done */
2266 {
2267     char_u	*newp;
2268     linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2269     colnr_T	col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2270 
2271     if (col == 0)
2272 	newp = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
2273     else
2274 	newp = vim_strnsave(ml_get(lnum), col);
2275 
2276     if (newp == NULL)
2277 	return FAIL;
2278 
2279     ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2280 
2281     /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2282     changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
2283 
2284     /*
2285      * If "fixpos" is TRUE we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL.
2286      */
2287     if (fixpos && curwin->w_cursor.col > 0)
2288 	--curwin->w_cursor.col;
2289 
2290     return OK;
2291 }
2292 
2293 /*
2294  * Delete "nlines" lines at the cursor.
2295  * Saves the lines for undo first if "undo" is TRUE.
2296  */
2297     void
2298 del_lines(nlines, undo)
2299     long	nlines;		/* number of lines to delete */
2300     int		undo;		/* if TRUE, prepare for undo */
2301 {
2302     long	n;
2303 
2304     if (nlines <= 0)
2305 	return;
2306 
2307     /* save the deleted lines for undo */
2308     if (undo && u_savedel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, nlines) == FAIL)
2309 	return;
2310 
2311     for (n = 0; n < nlines; )
2312     {
2313 	if (curbuf->b_ml.ml_flags & ML_EMPTY)	    /* nothing to delete */
2314 	    break;
2315 
2316 	ml_delete(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE);
2317 	++n;
2318 
2319 	/* If we delete the last line in the file, stop */
2320 	if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
2321 	    break;
2322     }
2323     /* adjust marks, mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2324     deleted_lines_mark(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, n);
2325 
2326     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
2327     check_cursor_lnum();
2328 }
2329 
2330     int
2331 gchar_pos(pos)
2332     pos_T *pos;
2333 {
2334     char_u	*ptr = ml_get_pos(pos);
2335 
2336 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2337     if (has_mbyte)
2338 	return (*mb_ptr2char)(ptr);
2339 #endif
2340     return (int)*ptr;
2341 }
2342 
2343     int
2344 gchar_cursor()
2345 {
2346 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2347     if (has_mbyte)
2348 	return (*mb_ptr2char)(ml_get_cursor());
2349 #endif
2350     return (int)*ml_get_cursor();
2351 }
2352 
2353 /*
2354  * Write a character at the current cursor position.
2355  * It is directly written into the block.
2356  */
2357     void
2358 pchar_cursor(c)
2359     int c;
2360 {
2361     *(ml_get_buf(curbuf, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE)
2362 						  + curwin->w_cursor.col) = c;
2363 }
2364 
2365 #if 0 /* not used */
2366 /*
2367  * Put *pos at end of current buffer
2368  */
2369     void
2370 goto_endofbuf(pos)
2371     pos_T    *pos;
2372 {
2373     char_u  *p;
2374 
2375     pos->lnum = curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count;
2376     pos->col = 0;
2377     p = ml_get(pos->lnum);
2378     while (*p++)
2379 	++pos->col;
2380 }
2381 #endif
2382 
2383 /*
2384  * When extra == 0: Return TRUE if the cursor is before or on the first
2385  *		    non-blank in the line.
2386  * When extra == 1: Return TRUE if the cursor is before the first non-blank in
2387  *		    the line.
2388  */
2389     int
2390 inindent(extra)
2391     int	    extra;
2392 {
2393     char_u	*ptr;
2394     colnr_T	col;
2395 
2396     for (col = 0, ptr = ml_get_curline(); vim_iswhite(*ptr); ++col)
2397 	++ptr;
2398     if (col >= curwin->w_cursor.col + extra)
2399 	return TRUE;
2400     else
2401 	return FALSE;
2402 }
2403 
2404 /*
2405  * Skip to next part of an option argument: Skip space and comma.
2406  */
2407     char_u *
2408 skip_to_option_part(p)
2409     char_u  *p;
2410 {
2411     if (*p == ',')
2412 	++p;
2413     while (*p == ' ')
2414 	++p;
2415     return p;
2416 }
2417 
2418 /*
2419  * changed() is called when something in the current buffer is changed.
2420  *
2421  * Most often called through changed_bytes() and changed_lines(), which also
2422  * mark the area of the display to be redrawn.
2423  */
2424     void
2425 changed()
2426 {
2427 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK)
2428     /* The text of the preediting area is inserted, but this doesn't
2429      * mean a change of the buffer yet.  That is delayed until the
2430      * text is committed. (this means preedit becomes empty) */
2431     if (im_is_preediting() && !xim_changed_while_preediting)
2432 	return;
2433     xim_changed_while_preediting = FALSE;
2434 #endif
2435 
2436     if (!curbuf->b_changed)
2437     {
2438 	int	save_msg_scroll = msg_scroll;
2439 
2440 	change_warning(0);
2441 	/* Create a swap file if that is wanted.
2442 	 * Don't do this for "nofile" and "nowrite" buffer types. */
2443 	if (curbuf->b_may_swap
2444 #ifdef FEAT_QUICKFIX
2445 		&& !bt_dontwrite(curbuf)
2446 #endif
2447 		)
2448 	{
2449 	    ml_open_file(curbuf);
2450 
2451 	    /* The ml_open_file() can cause an ATTENTION message.
2452 	     * Wait two seconds, to make sure the user reads this unexpected
2453 	     * message.  Since we could be anywhere, call wait_return() now,
2454 	     * and don't let the emsg() set msg_scroll. */
2455 	    if (need_wait_return && emsg_silent == 0)
2456 	    {
2457 		out_flush();
2458 		ui_delay(2000L, TRUE);
2459 		wait_return(TRUE);
2460 		msg_scroll = save_msg_scroll;
2461 	    }
2462 	}
2463 	curbuf->b_changed = TRUE;
2464 	ml_setflags(curbuf);
2465 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2466 	check_status(curbuf);
2467 	redraw_tabline = TRUE;
2468 #endif
2469 #ifdef FEAT_TITLE
2470 	need_maketitle = TRUE;	    /* set window title later */
2471 #endif
2472     }
2473     ++curbuf->b_changedtick;
2474 }
2475 
2476 static void changedOneline __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum));
2477 static void changed_lines_buf __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum, linenr_T lnume, long xtra));
2478 static void changed_common __ARGS((linenr_T lnum, colnr_T col, linenr_T lnume, long xtra));
2479 
2480 /*
2481  * Changed bytes within a single line for the current buffer.
2482  * - marks the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
2483  * - marks the buffer changed by calling changed()
2484  * - invalidates cached values
2485  */
2486     void
2487 changed_bytes(lnum, col)
2488     linenr_T	lnum;
2489     colnr_T	col;
2490 {
2491     changedOneline(curbuf, lnum);
2492     changed_common(lnum, col, lnum + 1, 0L);
2493 
2494 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF
2495     /* Diff highlighting in other diff windows may need to be updated too. */
2496     if (curwin->w_p_diff)
2497     {
2498 	win_T	    *wp;
2499 	linenr_T    wlnum;
2500 
2501 	for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2502 	    if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin)
2503 	    {
2504 		redraw_win_later(wp, VALID);
2505 		wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp);
2506 		if (wlnum > 0)
2507 		    changedOneline(wp->w_buffer, wlnum);
2508 	    }
2509     }
2510 #endif
2511 }
2512 
2513     static void
2514 changedOneline(buf, lnum)
2515     buf_T	*buf;
2516     linenr_T	lnum;
2517 {
2518     if (buf->b_mod_set)
2519     {
2520 	/* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
2521 	if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top)
2522 	    buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2523 	else if (lnum >= buf->b_mod_bot)
2524 	    buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
2525     }
2526     else
2527     {
2528 	/* set the area that must be redisplayed to one line */
2529 	buf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
2530 	buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2531 	buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
2532 	buf->b_mod_xlines = 0;
2533     }
2534 }
2535 
2536 /*
2537  * Appended "count" lines below line "lnum" in the current buffer.
2538  * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2539  * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
2540  */
2541     void
2542 appended_lines(lnum, count)
2543     linenr_T	lnum;
2544     long	count;
2545 {
2546     changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
2547 }
2548 
2549 /*
2550  * Like appended_lines(), but adjust marks first.
2551  */
2552     void
2553 appended_lines_mark(lnum, count)
2554     linenr_T	lnum;
2555     long	count;
2556 {
2557     mark_adjust(lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, count, 0L);
2558     changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
2559 }
2560 
2561 /*
2562  * Deleted "count" lines at line "lnum" in the current buffer.
2563  * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2564  * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
2565  */
2566     void
2567 deleted_lines(lnum, count)
2568     linenr_T	lnum;
2569     long	count;
2570 {
2571     changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
2572 }
2573 
2574 /*
2575  * Like deleted_lines(), but adjust marks first.
2576  */
2577     void
2578 deleted_lines_mark(lnum, count)
2579     linenr_T	lnum;
2580     long	count;
2581 {
2582     mark_adjust(lnum, (linenr_T)(lnum + count - 1), (long)MAXLNUM, -count);
2583     changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
2584 }
2585 
2586 /*
2587  * Changed lines for the current buffer.
2588  * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2589  * - mark the buffer changed by calling changed()
2590  * - mark the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
2591  * - invalidate cached values
2592  * "lnum" is the first line that needs displaying, "lnume" the first line
2593  * below the changed lines (BEFORE the change).
2594  * When only inserting lines, "lnum" and "lnume" are equal.
2595  * Takes care of calling changed() and updating b_mod_*.
2596  */
2597     void
2598 changed_lines(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
2599     linenr_T	lnum;	    /* first line with change */
2600     colnr_T	col;	    /* column in first line with change */
2601     linenr_T	lnume;	    /* line below last changed line */
2602     long	xtra;	    /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */
2603 {
2604     changed_lines_buf(curbuf, lnum, lnume, xtra);
2605 
2606 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF
2607     if (xtra == 0 && curwin->w_p_diff)
2608     {
2609 	/* When the number of lines doesn't change then mark_adjust() isn't
2610 	 * called and other diff buffers still need to be marked for
2611 	 * displaying. */
2612 	win_T	    *wp;
2613 	linenr_T    wlnum;
2614 
2615 	for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2616 	    if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin)
2617 	    {
2618 		redraw_win_later(wp, VALID);
2619 		wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp);
2620 		if (wlnum > 0)
2621 		    changed_lines_buf(wp->w_buffer, wlnum,
2622 						    lnume - lnum + wlnum, 0L);
2623 	    }
2624     }
2625 #endif
2626 
2627     changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra);
2628 }
2629 
2630     static void
2631 changed_lines_buf(buf, lnum, lnume, xtra)
2632     buf_T	*buf;
2633     linenr_T	lnum;	    /* first line with change */
2634     linenr_T	lnume;	    /* line below last changed line */
2635     long	xtra;	    /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */
2636 {
2637     if (buf->b_mod_set)
2638     {
2639 	/* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
2640 	if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top)
2641 	    buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2642 	if (lnum < buf->b_mod_bot)
2643 	{
2644 	    /* adjust old bot position for xtra lines */
2645 	    buf->b_mod_bot += xtra;
2646 	    if (buf->b_mod_bot < lnum)
2647 		buf->b_mod_bot = lnum;
2648 	}
2649 	if (lnume + xtra > buf->b_mod_bot)
2650 	    buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
2651 	buf->b_mod_xlines += xtra;
2652     }
2653     else
2654     {
2655 	/* set the area that must be redisplayed */
2656 	buf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
2657 	buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2658 	buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
2659 	buf->b_mod_xlines = xtra;
2660     }
2661 }
2662 
2663     static void
2664 changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
2665     linenr_T	lnum;
2666     colnr_T	col;
2667     linenr_T	lnume;
2668     long	xtra;
2669 {
2670     win_T	*wp;
2671     int		i;
2672 #ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
2673     int		cols;
2674     pos_T	*p;
2675     int		add;
2676 #endif
2677 
2678     /* mark the buffer as modified */
2679     changed();
2680 
2681     /* set the '. mark */
2682     if (!cmdmod.keepjumps)
2683     {
2684 	curbuf->b_last_change.lnum = lnum;
2685 	curbuf->b_last_change.col = col;
2686 
2687 #ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
2688 	/* Create a new entry if a new undo-able change was started or we
2689 	 * don't have an entry yet. */
2690 	if (curbuf->b_new_change || curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
2691 	{
2692 	    if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
2693 		add = TRUE;
2694 	    else
2695 	    {
2696 		/* Don't create a new entry when the line number is the same
2697 		 * as the last one and the column is not too far away.  Avoids
2698 		 * creating many entries for typing "xxxxx". */
2699 		p = &curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1];
2700 		if (p->lnum != lnum)
2701 		    add = TRUE;
2702 		else
2703 		{
2704 		    cols = comp_textwidth(FALSE);
2705 		    if (cols == 0)
2706 			cols = 79;
2707 		    add = (p->col + cols < col || col + cols < p->col);
2708 		}
2709 	    }
2710 	    if (add)
2711 	    {
2712 		/* This is the first of a new sequence of undo-able changes
2713 		 * and it's at some distance of the last change.  Use a new
2714 		 * position in the changelist. */
2715 		curbuf->b_new_change = FALSE;
2716 
2717 		if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == JUMPLISTSIZE)
2718 		{
2719 		    /* changelist is full: remove oldest entry */
2720 		    curbuf->b_changelistlen = JUMPLISTSIZE - 1;
2721 		    mch_memmove(curbuf->b_changelist, curbuf->b_changelist + 1,
2722 					  sizeof(pos_T) * (JUMPLISTSIZE - 1));
2723 		    FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2724 		    {
2725 			/* Correct position in changelist for other windows on
2726 			 * this buffer. */
2727 			if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf && wp->w_changelistidx > 0)
2728 			    --wp->w_changelistidx;
2729 		    }
2730 		}
2731 		FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2732 		{
2733 		    /* For other windows, if the position in the changelist is
2734 		     * at the end it stays at the end. */
2735 		    if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf
2736 			    && wp->w_changelistidx == curbuf->b_changelistlen)
2737 			++wp->w_changelistidx;
2738 		}
2739 		++curbuf->b_changelistlen;
2740 	    }
2741 	}
2742 	curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1] =
2743 							curbuf->b_last_change;
2744 	/* The current window is always after the last change, so that "g,"
2745 	 * takes you back to it. */
2746 	curwin->w_changelistidx = curbuf->b_changelistlen;
2747 #endif
2748     }
2749 
2750     FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2751     {
2752 	if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf)
2753 	{
2754 	    /* Mark this window to be redrawn later. */
2755 	    if (wp->w_redr_type < VALID)
2756 		wp->w_redr_type = VALID;
2757 
2758 	    /* Check if a change in the buffer has invalidated the cached
2759 	     * values for the cursor. */
2760 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2761 	    /*
2762 	     * Update the folds for this window.  Can't postpone this, because
2763 	     * a following operator might work on the whole fold: ">>dd".
2764 	     */
2765 	    foldUpdate(wp, lnum, lnume + xtra - 1);
2766 
2767 	    /* The change may cause lines above or below the change to become
2768 	     * included in a fold.  Set lnum/lnume to the first/last line that
2769 	     * might be displayed differently.
2770 	     * Set w_cline_folded here as an efficient way to update it when
2771 	     * inserting lines just above a closed fold. */
2772 	    i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnum, &lnum, NULL, FALSE, NULL);
2773 	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum)
2774 		wp->w_cline_folded = i;
2775 	    i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnume, NULL, &lnume, FALSE, NULL);
2776 	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnume)
2777 		wp->w_cline_folded = i;
2778 
2779 	    /* If the changed line is in a range of previously folded lines,
2780 	     * compare with the first line in that range. */
2781 	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum <= lnum)
2782 	    {
2783 		i = find_wl_entry(wp, lnum);
2784 		if (i >= 0 && wp->w_cursor.lnum > wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum)
2785 		    changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
2786 	    }
2787 #endif
2788 
2789 	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum > lnum)
2790 		changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
2791 	    else if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum && wp->w_cursor.col >= col)
2792 		changed_cline_bef_curs_win(wp);
2793 	    if (wp->w_botline >= lnum)
2794 	    {
2795 		/* Assume that botline doesn't change (inserted lines make
2796 		 * other lines scroll down below botline). */
2797 		approximate_botline_win(wp);
2798 	    }
2799 
2800 	    /* Check if any w_lines[] entries have become invalid.
2801 	     * For entries below the change: Correct the lnums for
2802 	     * inserted/deleted lines.  Makes it possible to stop displaying
2803 	     * after the change. */
2804 	    for (i = 0; i < wp->w_lines_valid; ++i)
2805 		if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid)
2806 		{
2807 		    if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum >= lnum)
2808 		    {
2809 			if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum < lnume)
2810 			{
2811 			    /* line included in change */
2812 			    wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
2813 			}
2814 			else if (xtra != 0)
2815 			{
2816 			    /* line below change */
2817 			    wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum += xtra;
2818 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2819 			    wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum += xtra;
2820 #endif
2821 			}
2822 		    }
2823 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2824 		    else if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum >= lnum)
2825 		    {
2826 			/* change somewhere inside this range of folded lines,
2827 			 * may need to be redrawn */
2828 			wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
2829 		    }
2830 #endif
2831 		}
2832 	}
2833     }
2834 
2835     /* Call update_screen() later, which checks out what needs to be redrawn,
2836      * since it notices b_mod_set and then uses b_mod_*. */
2837     if (must_redraw < VALID)
2838 	must_redraw = VALID;
2839 
2840 #ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2841     /* when the cursor line is changed always trigger CursorMoved */
2842     if (lnum <= curwin->w_cursor.lnum && lnume > curwin->w_cursor.lnum)
2843 	last_cursormoved.lnum = 0;
2844 #endif
2845 }
2846 
2847 /*
2848  * unchanged() is called when the changed flag must be reset for buffer 'buf'
2849  */
2850     void
2851 unchanged(buf, ff)
2852     buf_T	*buf;
2853     int		ff;	/* also reset 'fileformat' */
2854 {
2855     if (buf->b_changed || (ff && file_ff_differs(buf)))
2856     {
2857 	buf->b_changed = 0;
2858 	ml_setflags(buf);
2859 	if (ff)
2860 	    save_file_ff(buf);
2861 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2862 	check_status(buf);
2863 	redraw_tabline = TRUE;
2864 #endif
2865 #ifdef FEAT_TITLE
2866 	need_maketitle = TRUE;	    /* set window title later */
2867 #endif
2868     }
2869     ++buf->b_changedtick;
2870 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
2871     netbeans_unmodified(buf);
2872 #endif
2873 }
2874 
2875 #if defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) || defined(PROTO)
2876 /*
2877  * check_status: called when the status bars for the buffer 'buf'
2878  *		 need to be updated
2879  */
2880     void
2881 check_status(buf)
2882     buf_T	*buf;
2883 {
2884     win_T	*wp;
2885 
2886     for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2887 	if (wp->w_buffer == buf && wp->w_status_height)
2888 	{
2889 	    wp->w_redr_status = TRUE;
2890 	    if (must_redraw < VALID)
2891 		must_redraw = VALID;
2892 	}
2893 }
2894 #endif
2895 
2896 /*
2897  * If the file is readonly, give a warning message with the first change.
2898  * Don't do this for autocommands.
2899  * Don't use emsg(), because it flushes the macro buffer.
2900  * If we have undone all changes b_changed will be FALSE, but "b_did_warn"
2901  * will be TRUE.
2902  */
2903     void
2904 change_warning(col)
2905     int	    col;		/* column for message; non-zero when in insert
2906 				   mode and 'showmode' is on */
2907 {
2908     if (curbuf->b_did_warn == FALSE
2909 	    && curbufIsChanged() == 0
2910 #ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2911 	    && !autocmd_busy
2912 #endif
2913 	    && curbuf->b_p_ro)
2914     {
2915 #ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2916 	apply_autocmds(EVENT_FILECHANGEDRO, NULL, NULL, FALSE, curbuf);
2917 	if (!curbuf->b_p_ro)
2918 	    return;
2919 #endif
2920 	/*
2921 	 * Do what msg() does, but with a column offset if the warning should
2922 	 * be after the mode message.
2923 	 */
2924 	msg_start();
2925 	if (msg_row == Rows - 1)
2926 	    msg_col = col;
2927 	msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W));
2928 	MSG_PUTS_ATTR(_("W10: Warning: Changing a readonly file"),
2929 						   hl_attr(HLF_W) | MSG_HIST);
2930 	msg_clr_eos();
2931 	(void)msg_end();
2932 	if (msg_silent == 0 && !silent_mode)
2933 	{
2934 	    out_flush();
2935 	    ui_delay(1000L, TRUE); /* give the user time to think about it */
2936 	}
2937 	curbuf->b_did_warn = TRUE;
2938 	redraw_cmdline = FALSE;	/* don't redraw and erase the message */
2939 	if (msg_row < Rows - 1)
2940 	    showmode();
2941     }
2942 }
2943 
2944 /*
2945  * Ask for a reply from the user, a 'y' or a 'n'.
2946  * No other characters are accepted, the message is repeated until a valid
2947  * reply is entered or CTRL-C is hit.
2948  * If direct is TRUE, don't use vgetc() but ui_inchar(), don't get characters
2949  * from any buffers but directly from the user.
2950  *
2951  * return the 'y' or 'n'
2952  */
2953     int
2954 ask_yesno(str, direct)
2955     char_u  *str;
2956     int	    direct;
2957 {
2958     int	    r = ' ';
2959     int	    save_State = State;
2960 
2961     if (exiting)		/* put terminal in raw mode for this question */
2962 	settmode(TMODE_RAW);
2963     ++no_wait_return;
2964 #ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
2965     dont_scroll = TRUE;		/* disallow scrolling here */
2966 #endif
2967     State = CONFIRM;		/* mouse behaves like with :confirm */
2968 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
2969     setmouse();			/* disables mouse for xterm */
2970 #endif
2971     ++no_mapping;
2972     ++allow_keys;		/* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
2973 
2974     while (r != 'y' && r != 'n')
2975     {
2976 	/* same highlighting as for wait_return */
2977 	smsg_attr(hl_attr(HLF_R), (char_u *)"%s (y/n)?", str);
2978 	if (direct)
2979 	    r = get_keystroke();
2980 	else
2981 	    r = safe_vgetc();
2982 	if (r == Ctrl_C || r == ESC)
2983 	    r = 'n';
2984 	msg_putchar(r);	    /* show what you typed */
2985 	out_flush();
2986     }
2987     --no_wait_return;
2988     State = save_State;
2989 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
2990     setmouse();
2991 #endif
2992     --no_mapping;
2993     --allow_keys;
2994 
2995     return r;
2996 }
2997 
2998 /*
2999  * Get a key stroke directly from the user.
3000  * Ignores mouse clicks and scrollbar events, except a click for the left
3001  * button (used at the more prompt).
3002  * Doesn't use vgetc(), because it syncs undo and eats mapped characters.
3003  * Disadvantage: typeahead is ignored.
3004  * Translates the interrupt character for unix to ESC.
3005  */
3006     int
3007 get_keystroke()
3008 {
3009 #define CBUFLEN 151
3010     char_u	buf[CBUFLEN];
3011     int		len = 0;
3012     int		n;
3013     int		save_mapped_ctrl_c = mapped_ctrl_c;
3014 
3015     mapped_ctrl_c = FALSE;	/* mappings are not used here */
3016     for (;;)
3017     {
3018 	cursor_on();
3019 	out_flush();
3020 
3021 	/* First time: blocking wait.  Second time: wait up to 100ms for a
3022 	 * terminal code to complete.  Leave some room for check_termcode() to
3023 	 * insert a key code into (max 5 chars plus NUL).  And
3024 	 * fix_input_buffer() can triple the number of bytes. */
3025 	n = ui_inchar(buf + len, (CBUFLEN - 6 - len) / 3,
3026 						    len == 0 ? -1L : 100L, 0);
3027 	if (n > 0)
3028 	{
3029 	    /* Replace zero and CSI by a special key code. */
3030 	    n = fix_input_buffer(buf + len, n, FALSE);
3031 	    len += n;
3032 	}
3033 
3034 	/* incomplete termcode: get more characters */
3035 	if ((n = check_termcode(1, buf, len)) < 0)
3036 	    continue;
3037 	/* found a termcode: adjust length */
3038 	if (n > 0)
3039 	    len = n;
3040 	if (len == 0)	    /* nothing typed yet */
3041 	    continue;
3042 
3043 	/* Handle modifier and/or special key code. */
3044 	n = buf[0];
3045 	if (n == K_SPECIAL)
3046 	{
3047 	    n = TO_SPECIAL(buf[1], buf[2]);
3048 	    if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER
3049 		    || n == K_IGNORE
3050 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
3051 		    || n == K_LEFTMOUSE_NM
3052 		    || n == K_LEFTDRAG
3053 		    || n == K_LEFTRELEASE
3054 		    || n == K_LEFTRELEASE_NM
3055 		    || n == K_MIDDLEMOUSE
3056 		    || n == K_MIDDLEDRAG
3057 		    || n == K_MIDDLERELEASE
3058 		    || n == K_RIGHTMOUSE
3059 		    || n == K_RIGHTDRAG
3060 		    || n == K_RIGHTRELEASE
3061 		    || n == K_MOUSEDOWN
3062 		    || n == K_MOUSEUP
3063 		    || n == K_X1MOUSE
3064 		    || n == K_X1DRAG
3065 		    || n == K_X1RELEASE
3066 		    || n == K_X2MOUSE
3067 		    || n == K_X2DRAG
3068 		    || n == K_X2RELEASE
3069 # ifdef FEAT_GUI
3070 		    || n == K_VER_SCROLLBAR
3071 		    || n == K_HOR_SCROLLBAR
3072 # endif
3073 #endif
3074 	       )
3075 	    {
3076 		if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER)
3077 		    mod_mask = buf[2];
3078 		len -= 3;
3079 		if (len > 0)
3080 		    mch_memmove(buf, buf + 3, (size_t)len);
3081 		continue;
3082 	    }
3083 	}
3084 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
3085 	if (has_mbyte)
3086 	{
3087 	    if (MB_BYTE2LEN(n) > len)
3088 		continue;	/* more bytes to get */
3089 	    buf[len >= CBUFLEN ? CBUFLEN - 1 : len] = NUL;
3090 	    n = (*mb_ptr2char)(buf);
3091 	}
3092 #endif
3093 #ifdef UNIX
3094 	if (n == intr_char)
3095 	    n = ESC;
3096 #endif
3097 	break;
3098     }
3099 
3100     mapped_ctrl_c = save_mapped_ctrl_c;
3101     return n;
3102 }
3103 
3104 /*
3105  * Get a number from the user.
3106  * When "mouse_used" is not NULL allow using the mouse.
3107  */
3108     int
3109 get_number(colon, mouse_used)
3110     int	    colon;			/* allow colon to abort */
3111     int	    *mouse_used;
3112 {
3113     int	n = 0;
3114     int	c;
3115 
3116     if (mouse_used != NULL)
3117 	*mouse_used = FALSE;
3118 
3119     /* When not printing messages, the user won't know what to type, return a
3120      * zero (as if CR was hit). */
3121     if (msg_silent != 0)
3122 	return 0;
3123 
3124 #ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
3125     dont_scroll = TRUE;		/* disallow scrolling here */
3126 #endif
3127     ++no_mapping;
3128     ++allow_keys;		/* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
3129     for (;;)
3130     {
3131 	windgoto(msg_row, msg_col);
3132 	c = safe_vgetc();
3133 	if (VIM_ISDIGIT(c))
3134 	{
3135 	    n = n * 10 + c - '0';
3136 	    msg_putchar(c);
3137 	}
3138 	else if (c == K_DEL || c == K_KDEL || c == K_BS || c == Ctrl_H)
3139 	{
3140 	    n /= 10;
3141 	    MSG_PUTS("\b \b");
3142 	}
3143 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
3144 	else if (mouse_used != NULL && c == K_LEFTMOUSE)
3145 	{
3146 	    *mouse_used = TRUE;
3147 	    n = mouse_row + 1;
3148 	    break;
3149 	}
3150 #endif
3151 	else if (n == 0 && c == ':' && colon)
3152 	{
3153 	    stuffcharReadbuff(':');
3154 	    if (!exmode_active)
3155 		cmdline_row = msg_row;
3156 	    skip_redraw = TRUE;	    /* skip redraw once */
3157 	    do_redraw = FALSE;
3158 	    break;
3159 	}
3160 	else if (c == CAR || c == NL || c == Ctrl_C || c == ESC)
3161 	    break;
3162     }
3163     --no_mapping;
3164     --allow_keys;
3165     return n;
3166 }
3167 
3168 /*
3169  * Ask the user to enter a number.
3170  * When "mouse_used" is not NULL allow using the mouse and in that case return
3171  * the line number.
3172  */
3173     int
3174 prompt_for_number(mouse_used)
3175     int		*mouse_used;
3176 {
3177     int		i;
3178     int		save_cmdline_row;
3179     int		save_State;
3180 
3181     /* When using ":silent" assume that <CR> was entered. */
3182     if (mouse_used != NULL)
3183 	MSG_PUTS(_("Type number or click with mouse (<Enter> cancels): "));
3184     else
3185 	MSG_PUTS(_("Choice number (<Enter> cancels): "));
3186 
3187     /* Set the state such that text can be selected/copied/pasted. */
3188     save_cmdline_row = cmdline_row;
3189     cmdline_row = Rows - 1;
3190     save_State = State;
3191     if (mouse_used == NULL)
3192 	State = CMDLINE;
3193     else
3194 	State = NORMAL;
3195 
3196     i = get_number(TRUE, mouse_used);
3197     if (KeyTyped)
3198     {
3199 	/* don't call wait_return() now */
3200 	/* msg_putchar('\n'); */
3201 	cmdline_row = msg_row - 1;
3202 	need_wait_return = FALSE;
3203 	msg_didany = FALSE;
3204     }
3205     else
3206 	cmdline_row = save_cmdline_row;
3207     State = save_State;
3208 
3209     return i;
3210 }
3211 
3212     void
3213 msgmore(n)
3214     long n;
3215 {
3216     long pn;
3217 
3218     if (global_busy	    /* no messages now, wait until global is finished */
3219 	    || !messaging())  /* 'lazyredraw' set, don't do messages now */
3220 	return;
3221 
3222     /* We don't want to overwrite another important message, but do overwrite
3223      * a previous "more lines" or "fewer lines" message, so that "5dd" and
3224      * then "put" reports the last action. */
3225     if (keep_msg != NULL && !keep_msg_more)
3226 	return;
3227 
3228     if (n > 0)
3229 	pn = n;
3230     else
3231 	pn = -n;
3232 
3233     if (pn > p_report)
3234     {
3235 	if (pn == 1)
3236 	{
3237 	    if (n > 0)
3238 		STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 more line"));
3239 	    else
3240 		STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 line less"));
3241 	}
3242 	else
3243 	{
3244 	    if (n > 0)
3245 		sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld more lines"), pn);
3246 	    else
3247 		sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld fewer lines"), pn);
3248 	}
3249 	if (got_int)
3250 	    STRCAT(msg_buf, _(" (Interrupted)"));
3251 	if (msg(msg_buf))
3252 	{
3253 	    set_keep_msg(msg_buf, 0);
3254 	    keep_msg_more = TRUE;
3255 	}
3256     }
3257 }
3258 
3259 /*
3260  * flush map and typeahead buffers and give a warning for an error
3261  */
3262     void
3263 beep_flush()
3264 {
3265     if (emsg_silent == 0)
3266     {
3267 	flush_buffers(FALSE);
3268 	vim_beep();
3269     }
3270 }
3271 
3272 /*
3273  * give a warning for an error
3274  */
3275     void
3276 vim_beep()
3277 {
3278     if (emsg_silent == 0)
3279     {
3280 	if (p_vb
3281 #ifdef FEAT_GUI
3282 		/* While the GUI is starting up the termcap is set for the GUI
3283 		 * but the output still goes to a terminal. */
3284 		&& !(gui.in_use && gui.starting)
3285 #endif
3286 		)
3287 	{
3288 	    out_str(T_VB);
3289 	}
3290 	else
3291 	{
3292 #ifdef MSDOS
3293 	    /*
3294 	     * The number of beeps outputted is reduced to avoid having to wait
3295 	     * for all the beeps to finish. This is only a problem on systems
3296 	     * where the beeps don't overlap.
3297 	     */
3298 	    if (beep_count == 0 || beep_count == 10)
3299 	    {
3300 		out_char(BELL);
3301 		beep_count = 1;
3302 	    }
3303 	    else
3304 		++beep_count;
3305 #else
3306 	    out_char(BELL);
3307 #endif
3308 	}
3309 
3310 	/* When 'verbose' is set and we are sourcing a script or executing a
3311 	 * function give the user a hint where the beep comes from. */
3312 	if (vim_strchr(p_debug, 'e') != NULL)
3313 	{
3314 	    msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W));
3315 	    msg_attr((char_u *)_("Beep!"), hl_attr(HLF_W));
3316 	}
3317     }
3318 }
3319 
3320 /*
3321  * To get the "real" home directory:
3322  * - get value of $HOME
3323  * For Unix:
3324  *  - go to that directory
3325  *  - do mch_dirname() to get the real name of that directory.
3326  *  This also works with mounts and links.
3327  *  Don't do this for MS-DOS, it will change the "current dir" for a drive.
3328  */
3329 static char_u	*homedir = NULL;
3330 
3331     void
3332 init_homedir()
3333 {
3334     char_u  *var;
3335 
3336     /* In case we are called a second time (when 'encoding' changes). */
3337     vim_free(homedir);
3338     homedir = NULL;
3339 
3340 #ifdef VMS
3341     var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
3342 #else
3343     var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
3344 #endif
3345 
3346     if (var != NULL && *var == NUL)	/* empty is same as not set */
3347 	var = NULL;
3348 
3349 #ifdef WIN3264
3350     /*
3351      * Weird but true: $HOME may contain an indirect reference to another
3352      * variable, esp. "%USERPROFILE%".  Happens when $USERPROFILE isn't set
3353      * when $HOME is being set.
3354      */
3355     if (var != NULL && *var == '%')
3356     {
3357 	char_u	*p;
3358 	char_u	*exp;
3359 
3360 	p = vim_strchr(var + 1, '%');
3361 	if (p != NULL)
3362 	{
3363 	    vim_strncpy(NameBuff, var + 1, p - (var + 1));
3364 	    exp = mch_getenv(NameBuff);
3365 	    if (exp != NULL && *exp != NUL
3366 					&& STRLEN(exp) + STRLEN(p) < MAXPATHL)
3367 	    {
3368 		vim_snprintf((char *)NameBuff, MAXPATHL, "%s%s", exp, p + 1);
3369 		var = NameBuff;
3370 		/* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
3371 		vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
3372 	    }
3373 	}
3374     }
3375 
3376     /*
3377      * Typically, $HOME is not defined on Windows, unless the user has
3378      * specifically defined it for Vim's sake.  However, on Windows NT
3379      * platforms, $HOMEDRIVE and $HOMEPATH are automatically defined for
3380      * each user.  Try constructing $HOME from these.
3381      */
3382     if (var == NULL)
3383     {
3384 	char_u *homedrive, *homepath;
3385 
3386 	homedrive = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEDRIVE");
3387 	homepath = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEPATH");
3388 	if (homedrive != NULL && homepath != NULL
3389 			   && STRLEN(homedrive) + STRLEN(homepath) < MAXPATHL)
3390 	{
3391 	    sprintf((char *)NameBuff, "%s%s", homedrive, homepath);
3392 	    if (NameBuff[0] != NUL)
3393 	    {
3394 		var = NameBuff;
3395 		/* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
3396 		vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
3397 	    }
3398 	}
3399     }
3400 
3401 # if defined(FEAT_MBYTE)
3402     if (enc_utf8 && var != NULL)
3403     {
3404 	int	len;
3405 	char_u  *pp;
3406 
3407 	/* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8.  Other conversions are
3408 	 * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */
3409 	acp_to_enc(var, STRLEN(var), &pp, &len);
3410 	if (pp != NULL)
3411 	{
3412 	    homedir = pp;
3413 	    return;
3414 	}
3415     }
3416 # endif
3417 #endif
3418 
3419 #if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
3420     /*
3421      * Default home dir is C:/
3422      * Best assumption we can make in such a situation.
3423      */
3424     if (var == NULL)
3425 	var = "C:/";
3426 #endif
3427     if (var != NULL)
3428     {
3429 #ifdef UNIX
3430 	/*
3431 	 * Change to the directory and get the actual path.  This resolves
3432 	 * links.  Don't do it when we can't return.
3433 	 */
3434 	if (mch_dirname(NameBuff, MAXPATHL) == OK
3435 					  && mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) == 0)
3436 	{
3437 	    if (!mch_chdir((char *)var) && mch_dirname(IObuff, IOSIZE) == OK)
3438 		var = IObuff;
3439 	    if (mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) != 0)
3440 		EMSG(_(e_prev_dir));
3441 	}
3442 #endif
3443 	homedir = vim_strsave(var);
3444     }
3445 }
3446 
3447 #if defined(EXITFREE) || defined(PROTO)
3448     void
3449 free_homedir()
3450 {
3451     vim_free(homedir);
3452 }
3453 #endif
3454 
3455 /*
3456  * Expand environment variable with path name.
3457  * "~/" is also expanded, using $HOME.	For Unix "~user/" is expanded.
3458  * Skips over "\ ", "\~" and "\$".
3459  * If anything fails no expansion is done and dst equals src.
3460  */
3461     void
3462 expand_env(src, dst, dstlen)
3463     char_u	*src;		/* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
3464     char_u	*dst;		/* where to put the result */
3465     int		dstlen;		/* maximum length of the result */
3466 {
3467     expand_env_esc(src, dst, dstlen, FALSE, NULL);
3468 }
3469 
3470     void
3471 expand_env_esc(srcp, dst, dstlen, esc, startstr)
3472     char_u	*srcp;		/* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
3473     char_u	*dst;		/* where to put the result */
3474     int		dstlen;		/* maximum length of the result */
3475     int		esc;		/* escape spaces in expanded variables */
3476     char_u	*startstr;	/* start again after this (can be NULL) */
3477 {
3478     char_u	*src;
3479     char_u	*tail;
3480     int		c;
3481     char_u	*var;
3482     int		copy_char;
3483     int		mustfree;	/* var was allocated, need to free it later */
3484     int		at_start = TRUE; /* at start of a name */
3485     int		startstr_len = 0;
3486 
3487     if (startstr != NULL)
3488 	startstr_len = STRLEN(startstr);
3489 
3490     src = skipwhite(srcp);
3491     --dstlen;		    /* leave one char space for "\," */
3492     while (*src && dstlen > 0)
3493     {
3494 	copy_char = TRUE;
3495 	if ((*src == '$'
3496 #ifdef VMS
3497 		    && at_start
3498 #endif
3499 	   )
3500 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
3501 		|| *src == '%'
3502 #endif
3503 		|| (*src == '~' && at_start))
3504 	{
3505 	    mustfree = FALSE;
3506 
3507 	    /*
3508 	     * The variable name is copied into dst temporarily, because it may
3509 	     * be a string in read-only memory and a NUL needs to be appended.
3510 	     */
3511 	    if (*src != '~')				/* environment var */
3512 	    {
3513 		tail = src + 1;
3514 		var = dst;
3515 		c = dstlen - 1;
3516 
3517 #ifdef UNIX
3518 		/* Unix has ${var-name} type environment vars */
3519 		if (*tail == '{' && !vim_isIDc('{'))
3520 		{
3521 		    tail++;	/* ignore '{' */
3522 		    while (c-- > 0 && *tail && *tail != '}')
3523 			*var++ = *tail++;
3524 		}
3525 		else
3526 #endif
3527 		{
3528 		    while (c-- > 0 && *tail != NUL && ((vim_isIDc(*tail))
3529 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
3530 			    || (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
3531 #endif
3532 			    ))
3533 		    {
3534 #ifdef OS2		/* env vars only in uppercase */
3535 			*var++ = TOUPPER_LOC(*tail);
3536 			tail++;	    /* toupper() may be a macro! */
3537 #else
3538 			*var++ = *tail++;
3539 #endif
3540 		    }
3541 		}
3542 
3543 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
3544 # ifdef UNIX
3545 		if (src[1] == '{' && *tail != '}')
3546 # else
3547 		if (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
3548 # endif
3549 		    var = NULL;
3550 		else
3551 		{
3552 # ifdef UNIX
3553 		    if (src[1] == '{')
3554 # else
3555 		    if (*src == '%')
3556 #endif
3557 			++tail;
3558 #endif
3559 		    *var = NUL;
3560 		    var = vim_getenv(dst, &mustfree);
3561 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
3562 		}
3563 #endif
3564 	    }
3565 							/* home directory */
3566 	    else if (  src[1] == NUL
3567 		    || vim_ispathsep(src[1])
3568 		    || vim_strchr((char_u *)" ,\t\n", src[1]) != NULL)
3569 	    {
3570 		var = homedir;
3571 		tail = src + 1;
3572 	    }
3573 	    else					/* user directory */
3574 	    {
3575 #if defined(UNIX) || (defined(VMS) && defined(USER_HOME))
3576 		/*
3577 		 * Copy ~user to dst[], so we can put a NUL after it.
3578 		 */
3579 		tail = src;
3580 		var = dst;
3581 		c = dstlen - 1;
3582 		while (	   c-- > 0
3583 			&& *tail
3584 			&& vim_isfilec(*tail)
3585 			&& !vim_ispathsep(*tail))
3586 		    *var++ = *tail++;
3587 		*var = NUL;
3588 # ifdef UNIX
3589 		/*
3590 		 * If the system supports getpwnam(), use it.
3591 		 * Otherwise, or if getpwnam() fails, the shell is used to
3592 		 * expand ~user.  This is slower and may fail if the shell
3593 		 * does not support ~user (old versions of /bin/sh).
3594 		 */
3595 #  if defined(HAVE_GETPWNAM) && defined(HAVE_PWD_H)
3596 		{
3597 		    struct passwd *pw;
3598 
3599 		    /* Note: memory allocated by getpwnam() is never freed.
3600 		     * Calling endpwent() apparently doesn't help. */
3601 		    pw = getpwnam((char *)dst + 1);
3602 		    if (pw != NULL)
3603 			var = (char_u *)pw->pw_dir;
3604 		    else
3605 			var = NULL;
3606 		}
3607 		if (var == NULL)
3608 #  endif
3609 		{
3610 		    expand_T	xpc;
3611 
3612 		    ExpandInit(&xpc);
3613 		    xpc.xp_context = EXPAND_FILES;
3614 		    var = ExpandOne(&xpc, dst, NULL,
3615 				WILD_ADD_SLASH|WILD_SILENT, WILD_EXPAND_FREE);
3616 		    ExpandCleanup(&xpc);
3617 		    mustfree = TRUE;
3618 		}
3619 
3620 # else	/* !UNIX, thus VMS */
3621 		/*
3622 		 * USER_HOME is a comma-separated list of
3623 		 * directories to search for the user account in.
3624 		 */
3625 		{
3626 		    char_u	test[MAXPATHL], paths[MAXPATHL];
3627 		    char_u	*path, *next_path, *ptr;
3628 		    struct stat	st;
3629 
3630 		    STRCPY(paths, USER_HOME);
3631 		    next_path = paths;
3632 		    while (*next_path)
3633 		    {
3634 			for (path = next_path; *next_path && *next_path != ',';
3635 				next_path++);
3636 			if (*next_path)
3637 			    *next_path++ = NUL;
3638 			STRCPY(test, path);
3639 			STRCAT(test, "/");
3640 			STRCAT(test, dst + 1);
3641 			if (mch_stat(test, &st) == 0)
3642 			{
3643 			    var = alloc(STRLEN(test) + 1);
3644 			    STRCPY(var, test);
3645 			    mustfree = TRUE;
3646 			    break;
3647 			}
3648 		    }
3649 		}
3650 # endif /* UNIX */
3651 #else
3652 		/* cannot expand user's home directory, so don't try */
3653 		var = NULL;
3654 		tail = (char_u *)"";	/* for gcc */
3655 #endif /* UNIX || VMS */
3656 	    }
3657 
3658 #ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
3659 	    /* If 'shellslash' is set change backslashes to forward slashes.
3660 	     * Can't use slash_adjust(), p_ssl may be set temporarily. */
3661 	    if (p_ssl && var != NULL && vim_strchr(var, '\\') != NULL)
3662 	    {
3663 		char_u	*p = vim_strsave(var);
3664 
3665 		if (p != NULL)
3666 		{
3667 		    if (mustfree)
3668 			vim_free(var);
3669 		    var = p;
3670 		    mustfree = TRUE;
3671 		    forward_slash(var);
3672 		}
3673 	    }
3674 #endif
3675 
3676 	    /* If "var" contains white space, escape it with a backslash.
3677 	     * Required for ":e ~/tt" when $HOME includes a space. */
3678 	    if (esc && var != NULL && vim_strpbrk(var, (char_u *)" \t") != NULL)
3679 	    {
3680 		char_u	*p = vim_strsave_escaped(var, (char_u *)" \t");
3681 
3682 		if (p != NULL)
3683 		{
3684 		    if (mustfree)
3685 			vim_free(var);
3686 		    var = p;
3687 		    mustfree = TRUE;
3688 		}
3689 	    }
3690 
3691 	    if (var != NULL && *var != NUL
3692 		    && (STRLEN(var) + STRLEN(tail) + 1 < (unsigned)dstlen))
3693 	    {
3694 		STRCPY(dst, var);
3695 		dstlen -= (int)STRLEN(var);
3696 		c = STRLEN(var);
3697 		/* if var[] ends in a path separator and tail[] starts
3698 		 * with it, skip a character */
3699 		if (*var != NUL && after_pathsep(dst, dst + c)
3700 #if defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME) || defined(AMIGA)
3701 			&& dst[-1] != ':'
3702 #endif
3703 			&& vim_ispathsep(*tail))
3704 		    ++tail;
3705 		dst += c;
3706 		src = tail;
3707 		copy_char = FALSE;
3708 	    }
3709 	    if (mustfree)
3710 		vim_free(var);
3711 	}
3712 
3713 	if (copy_char)	    /* copy at least one char */
3714 	{
3715 	    /*
3716 	     * Recogize the start of a new name, for '~'.
3717 	     */
3718 	    at_start = FALSE;
3719 	    if (src[0] == '\\' && src[1] != NUL)
3720 	    {
3721 		*dst++ = *src++;
3722 		--dstlen;
3723 	    }
3724 	    else if (src[0] == ' ' || src[0] == ',')
3725 		at_start = TRUE;
3726 	    *dst++ = *src++;
3727 	    --dstlen;
3728 
3729 	    if (startstr != NULL && src - startstr_len >= srcp
3730 		    && STRNCMP(src - startstr_len, startstr, startstr_len) == 0)
3731 		at_start = TRUE;
3732 	}
3733     }
3734     *dst = NUL;
3735 }
3736 
3737 /*
3738  * Vim's version of getenv().
3739  * Special handling of $HOME, $VIM and $VIMRUNTIME.
3740  * Also does ACP to 'enc' conversion for Win32.
3741  */
3742     char_u *
3743 vim_getenv(name, mustfree)
3744     char_u	*name;
3745     int		*mustfree;	/* set to TRUE when returned is allocated */
3746 {
3747     char_u	*p;
3748     char_u	*pend;
3749     int		vimruntime;
3750 
3751 #if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
3752     /* use "C:/" when $HOME is not set */
3753     if (STRCMP(name, "HOME") == 0)
3754 	return homedir;
3755 #endif
3756 
3757     p = mch_getenv(name);
3758     if (p != NULL && *p == NUL)	    /* empty is the same as not set */
3759 	p = NULL;
3760 
3761     if (p != NULL)
3762     {
3763 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264)
3764 	if (enc_utf8)
3765 	{
3766 	    int	    len;
3767 	    char_u  *pp;
3768 
3769 	    /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8.  Other conversions are
3770 	     * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */
3771 	    acp_to_enc(p, STRLEN(p), &pp, &len);
3772 	    if (pp != NULL)
3773 	    {
3774 		p = pp;
3775 		*mustfree = TRUE;
3776 	    }
3777 	}
3778 #endif
3779 	return p;
3780     }
3781 
3782     vimruntime = (STRCMP(name, "VIMRUNTIME") == 0);
3783     if (!vimruntime && STRCMP(name, "VIM") != 0)
3784 	return NULL;
3785 
3786     /*
3787      * When expanding $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using $VIM/vim<version> or $VIM.
3788      * Don't do this when default_vimruntime_dir is non-empty.
3789      */
3790     if (vimruntime
3791 #ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
3792 	    && *default_vimruntime_dir == NUL
3793 #endif
3794        )
3795     {
3796 	p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
3797 	if (p != NULL && *p == NUL)	    /* empty is the same as not set */
3798 	    p = NULL;
3799 	if (p != NULL)
3800 	{
3801 	    p = vim_version_dir(p);
3802 	    if (p != NULL)
3803 		*mustfree = TRUE;
3804 	    else
3805 		p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
3806 
3807 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264)
3808 	    if (enc_utf8)
3809 	    {
3810 		int	len;
3811 		char_u  *pp;
3812 
3813 		/* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8.  Other conversions
3814 		 * are not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII
3815 		 * characters. */
3816 		acp_to_enc(p, STRLEN(p), &pp, &len);
3817 		if (pp != NULL)
3818 		{
3819 		    if (mustfree)
3820 			vim_free(p);
3821 		    p = pp;
3822 		    *mustfree = TRUE;
3823 		}
3824 	    }
3825 #endif
3826 	}
3827     }
3828 
3829     /*
3830      * When expanding $VIM or $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using:
3831      * - the directory name from 'helpfile' (unless it contains '$')
3832      * - the executable name from argv[0]
3833      */
3834     if (p == NULL)
3835     {
3836 	if (p_hf != NULL && vim_strchr(p_hf, '$') == NULL)
3837 	    p = p_hf;
3838 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3839 	/*
3840 	 * Use the name of the executable, obtained from argv[0].
3841 	 */
3842 	else
3843 	    p = exe_name;
3844 #endif
3845 	if (p != NULL)
3846 	{
3847 	    /* remove the file name */
3848 	    pend = gettail(p);
3849 
3850 	    /* remove "doc/" from 'helpfile', if present */
3851 	    if (p == p_hf)
3852 		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"doc");
3853 
3854 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3855 # ifdef MACOS_X
3856 	    /* remove "MacOS" from exe_name and add "Resources/vim" */
3857 	    if (p == exe_name)
3858 	    {
3859 		char_u	*pend1;
3860 		char_u	*pnew;
3861 
3862 		pend1 = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"MacOS");
3863 		if (pend1 != pend)
3864 		{
3865 		    pnew = alloc((unsigned)(pend1 - p) + 15);
3866 		    if (pnew != NULL)
3867 		    {
3868 			STRNCPY(pnew, p, (pend1 - p));
3869 			STRCPY(pnew + (pend1 - p), "Resources/vim");
3870 			p = pnew;
3871 			pend = p + STRLEN(p);
3872 		    }
3873 		}
3874 	    }
3875 # endif
3876 	    /* remove "src/" from exe_name, if present */
3877 	    if (p == exe_name)
3878 		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"src");
3879 #endif
3880 
3881 	    /* for $VIM, remove "runtime/" or "vim54/", if present */
3882 	    if (!vimruntime)
3883 	    {
3884 		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME);
3885 		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT);
3886 	    }
3887 
3888 	    /* remove trailing path separator */
3889 #ifndef MACOS_CLASSIC
3890 	    /* With MacOS path (with  colons) the final colon is required */
3891 	    /* to avoid confusion between absoulute and relative path */
3892 	    if (pend > p && after_pathsep(p, pend))
3893 		--pend;
3894 #endif
3895 
3896 #ifdef MACOS_X
3897 	    if (p == exe_name || p == p_hf)
3898 #endif
3899 		/* check that the result is a directory name */
3900 		p = vim_strnsave(p, (int)(pend - p));
3901 
3902 	    if (p != NULL && !mch_isdir(p))
3903 	    {
3904 		vim_free(p);
3905 		p = NULL;
3906 	    }
3907 	    else
3908 	    {
3909 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3910 		/* may add "/vim54" or "/runtime" if it exists */
3911 		if (vimruntime && (pend = vim_version_dir(p)) != NULL)
3912 		{
3913 		    vim_free(p);
3914 		    p = pend;
3915 		}
3916 #endif
3917 		*mustfree = TRUE;
3918 	    }
3919 	}
3920     }
3921 
3922 #ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
3923     /* When there is a pathdef.c file we can use default_vim_dir and
3924      * default_vimruntime_dir */
3925     if (p == NULL)
3926     {
3927 	/* Only use default_vimruntime_dir when it is not empty */
3928 	if (vimruntime && *default_vimruntime_dir != NUL)
3929 	{
3930 	    p = default_vimruntime_dir;
3931 	    *mustfree = FALSE;
3932 	}
3933 	else if (*default_vim_dir != NUL)
3934 	{
3935 	    if (vimruntime && (p = vim_version_dir(default_vim_dir)) != NULL)
3936 		*mustfree = TRUE;
3937 	    else
3938 	    {
3939 		p = default_vim_dir;
3940 		*mustfree = FALSE;
3941 	    }
3942 	}
3943     }
3944 #endif
3945 
3946     /*
3947      * Set the environment variable, so that the new value can be found fast
3948      * next time, and others can also use it (e.g. Perl).
3949      */
3950     if (p != NULL)
3951     {
3952 	if (vimruntime)
3953 	{
3954 	    vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIMRUNTIME", p);
3955 	    didset_vimruntime = TRUE;
3956 #ifdef FEAT_GETTEXT
3957 	    {
3958 		char_u	*buf = concat_str(p, (char_u *)"/lang");
3959 
3960 		if (buf != NULL)
3961 		{
3962 		    bindtextdomain(VIMPACKAGE, (char *)buf);
3963 		    vim_free(buf);
3964 		}
3965 	    }
3966 #endif
3967 	}
3968 	else
3969 	{
3970 	    vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIM", p);
3971 	    didset_vim = TRUE;
3972 	}
3973     }
3974     return p;
3975 }
3976 
3977 /*
3978  * Check if the directory "vimdir/<version>" or "vimdir/runtime" exists.
3979  * Return NULL if not, return its name in allocated memory otherwise.
3980  */
3981     static char_u *
3982 vim_version_dir(vimdir)
3983     char_u	*vimdir;
3984 {
3985     char_u	*p;
3986 
3987     if (vimdir == NULL || *vimdir == NUL)
3988 	return NULL;
3989     p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT, TRUE);
3990     if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
3991 	return p;
3992     vim_free(p);
3993     p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME, TRUE);
3994     if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
3995 	return p;
3996     vim_free(p);
3997     return NULL;
3998 }
3999 
4000 /*
4001  * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "name/", return "pend" minus
4002  * the length of "name/".  Otherwise return "pend".
4003  */
4004     static char_u *
4005 remove_tail(p, pend, name)
4006     char_u	*p;
4007     char_u	*pend;
4008     char_u	*name;
4009 {
4010     int		len = (int)STRLEN(name) + 1;
4011     char_u	*newend = pend - len;
4012 
4013     if (newend >= p
4014 	    && fnamencmp(newend, name, len - 1) == 0
4015 	    && (newend == p || after_pathsep(p, newend)))
4016 	return newend;
4017     return pend;
4018 }
4019 
4020 /*
4021  * Call expand_env() and store the result in an allocated string.
4022  * This is not very memory efficient, this expects the result to be freed
4023  * again soon.
4024  */
4025     char_u *
4026 expand_env_save(src)
4027     char_u	*src;
4028 {
4029     char_u	*p;
4030 
4031     p = alloc(MAXPATHL);
4032     if (p != NULL)
4033 	expand_env(src, p, MAXPATHL);
4034     return p;
4035 }
4036 
4037 /*
4038  * Our portable version of setenv.
4039  */
4040     void
4041 vim_setenv(name, val)
4042     char_u	*name;
4043     char_u	*val;
4044 {
4045 #ifdef HAVE_SETENV
4046     mch_setenv((char *)name, (char *)val, 1);
4047 #else
4048     char_u	*envbuf;
4049 
4050     /*
4051      * Putenv does not copy the string, it has to remain
4052      * valid.  The allocated memory will never be freed.
4053      */
4054     envbuf = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(name) + STRLEN(val) + 2));
4055     if (envbuf != NULL)
4056     {
4057 	sprintf((char *)envbuf, "%s=%s", name, val);
4058 	putenv((char *)envbuf);
4059     }
4060 #endif
4061 }
4062 
4063 #if defined(FEAT_CMDL_COMPL) || defined(PROTO)
4064 /*
4065  * Function given to ExpandGeneric() to obtain an environment variable name.
4066  */
4067 /*ARGSUSED*/
4068     char_u *
4069 get_env_name(xp, idx)
4070     expand_T	*xp;
4071     int		idx;
4072 {
4073 # if defined(AMIGA) || defined(__MRC__) || defined(__SC__)
4074     /*
4075      * No environ[] on the Amiga and on the Mac (using MPW).
4076      */
4077     return NULL;
4078 # else
4079 # ifndef __WIN32__
4080     /* Borland C++ 5.2 has this in a header file. */
4081     extern char		**environ;
4082 # endif
4083 # define ENVNAMELEN 100
4084     static char_u	name[ENVNAMELEN];
4085     char_u		*str;
4086     int			n;
4087 
4088     str = (char_u *)environ[idx];
4089     if (str == NULL)
4090 	return NULL;
4091 
4092     for (n = 0; n < ENVNAMELEN - 1; ++n)
4093     {
4094 	if (str[n] == '=' || str[n] == NUL)
4095 	    break;
4096 	name[n] = str[n];
4097     }
4098     name[n] = NUL;
4099     return name;
4100 # endif
4101 }
4102 #endif
4103 
4104 /*
4105  * Replace home directory by "~" in each space or comma separated file name in
4106  * 'src'.
4107  * If anything fails (except when out of space) dst equals src.
4108  */
4109     void
4110 home_replace(buf, src, dst, dstlen, one)
4111     buf_T	*buf;	/* when not NULL, check for help files */
4112     char_u	*src;	/* input file name */
4113     char_u	*dst;	/* where to put the result */
4114     int		dstlen;	/* maximum length of the result */
4115     int		one;	/* if TRUE, only replace one file name, include
4116 			   spaces and commas in the file name. */
4117 {
4118     size_t	dirlen = 0, envlen = 0;
4119     size_t	len;
4120     char_u	*homedir_env;
4121     char_u	*p;
4122 
4123     if (src == NULL)
4124     {
4125 	*dst = NUL;
4126 	return;
4127     }
4128 
4129     /*
4130      * If the file is a help file, remove the path completely.
4131      */
4132     if (buf != NULL && buf->b_help)
4133     {
4134 	STRCPY(dst, gettail(src));
4135 	return;
4136     }
4137 
4138     /*
4139      * We check both the value of the $HOME environment variable and the
4140      * "real" home directory.
4141      */
4142     if (homedir != NULL)
4143 	dirlen = STRLEN(homedir);
4144 
4145 #ifdef VMS
4146     homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
4147 #else
4148     homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
4149 #endif
4150 
4151     if (homedir_env != NULL && *homedir_env == NUL)
4152 	homedir_env = NULL;
4153     if (homedir_env != NULL)
4154 	envlen = STRLEN(homedir_env);
4155 
4156     if (!one)
4157 	src = skipwhite(src);
4158     while (*src && dstlen > 0)
4159     {
4160 	/*
4161 	 * Here we are at the beginning of a file name.
4162 	 * First, check to see if the beginning of the file name matches
4163 	 * $HOME or the "real" home directory. Check that there is a '/'
4164 	 * after the match (so that if e.g. the file is "/home/pieter/bla",
4165 	 * and the home directory is "/home/piet", the file does not end up
4166 	 * as "~er/bla" (which would seem to indicate the file "bla" in user
4167 	 * er's home directory)).
4168 	 */
4169 	p = homedir;
4170 	len = dirlen;
4171 	for (;;)
4172 	{
4173 	    if (   len
4174 		&& fnamencmp(src, p, len) == 0
4175 		&& (vim_ispathsep(src[len])
4176 		    || (!one && (src[len] == ',' || src[len] == ' '))
4177 		    || src[len] == NUL))
4178 	    {
4179 		src += len;
4180 		if (--dstlen > 0)
4181 		    *dst++ = '~';
4182 
4183 		/*
4184 		 * If it's just the home directory, add  "/".
4185 		 */
4186 		if (!vim_ispathsep(src[0]) && --dstlen > 0)
4187 		    *dst++ = '/';
4188 		break;
4189 	    }
4190 	    if (p == homedir_env)
4191 		break;
4192 	    p = homedir_env;
4193 	    len = envlen;
4194 	}
4195 
4196 	/* if (!one) skip to separator: space or comma */
4197 	while (*src && (one || (*src != ',' && *src != ' ')) && --dstlen > 0)
4198 	    *dst++ = *src++;
4199 	/* skip separator */
4200 	while ((*src == ' ' || *src == ',') && --dstlen > 0)
4201 	    *dst++ = *src++;
4202     }
4203     /* if (dstlen == 0) out of space, what to do??? */
4204 
4205     *dst = NUL;
4206 }
4207 
4208 /*
4209  * Like home_replace, store the replaced string in allocated memory.
4210  * When something fails, NULL is returned.
4211  */
4212     char_u  *
4213 home_replace_save(buf, src)
4214     buf_T	*buf;	/* when not NULL, check for help files */
4215     char_u	*src;	/* input file name */
4216 {
4217     char_u	*dst;
4218     unsigned	len;
4219 
4220     len = 3;			/* space for "~/" and trailing NUL */
4221     if (src != NULL)		/* just in case */
4222 	len += (unsigned)STRLEN(src);
4223     dst = alloc(len);
4224     if (dst != NULL)
4225 	home_replace(buf, src, dst, len, TRUE);
4226     return dst;
4227 }
4228 
4229 /*
4230  * Compare two file names and return:
4231  * FPC_SAME   if they both exist and are the same file.
4232  * FPC_SAMEX  if they both don't exist and have the same file name.
4233  * FPC_DIFF   if they both exist and are different files.
4234  * FPC_NOTX   if they both don't exist.
4235  * FPC_DIFFX  if one of them doesn't exist.
4236  * For the first name environment variables are expanded
4237  */
4238     int
4239 fullpathcmp(s1, s2, checkname)
4240     char_u *s1, *s2;
4241     int	    checkname;		/* when both don't exist, check file names */
4242 {
4243 #ifdef UNIX
4244     char_u	    exp1[MAXPATHL];
4245     char_u	    full1[MAXPATHL];
4246     char_u	    full2[MAXPATHL];
4247     struct stat	    st1, st2;
4248     int		    r1, r2;
4249 
4250     expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
4251     r1 = mch_stat((char *)exp1, &st1);
4252     r2 = mch_stat((char *)s2, &st2);
4253     if (r1 != 0 && r2 != 0)
4254     {
4255 	/* if mch_stat() doesn't work, may compare the names */
4256 	if (checkname)
4257 	{
4258 	    if (fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
4259 		return FPC_SAMEX;
4260 	    r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4261 	    r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4262 	    if (r1 == OK && r2 == OK && fnamecmp(full1, full2) == 0)
4263 		return FPC_SAMEX;
4264 	}
4265 	return FPC_NOTX;
4266     }
4267     if (r1 != 0 || r2 != 0)
4268 	return FPC_DIFFX;
4269     if (st1.st_dev == st2.st_dev && st1.st_ino == st2.st_ino)
4270 	return FPC_SAME;
4271     return FPC_DIFF;
4272 #else
4273     char_u  *exp1;		/* expanded s1 */
4274     char_u  *full1;		/* full path of s1 */
4275     char_u  *full2;		/* full path of s2 */
4276     int	    retval = FPC_DIFF;
4277     int	    r1, r2;
4278 
4279     /* allocate one buffer to store three paths (alloc()/free() is slow!) */
4280     if ((exp1 = alloc(MAXPATHL * 3)) != NULL)
4281     {
4282 	full1 = exp1 + MAXPATHL;
4283 	full2 = full1 + MAXPATHL;
4284 
4285 	expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
4286 	r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4287 	r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4288 
4289 	/* If vim_FullName() fails, the file probably doesn't exist. */
4290 	if (r1 != OK && r2 != OK)
4291 	{
4292 	    if (checkname && fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
4293 		retval = FPC_SAMEX;
4294 	    else
4295 		retval = FPC_NOTX;
4296 	}
4297 	else if (r1 != OK || r2 != OK)
4298 	    retval = FPC_DIFFX;
4299 	else if (fnamecmp(full1, full2))
4300 	    retval = FPC_DIFF;
4301 	else
4302 	    retval = FPC_SAME;
4303 	vim_free(exp1);
4304     }
4305     return retval;
4306 #endif
4307 }
4308 
4309 /*
4310  * Get the tail of a path: the file name.
4311  * Fail safe: never returns NULL.
4312  */
4313     char_u *
4314 gettail(fname)
4315     char_u *fname;
4316 {
4317     char_u  *p1, *p2;
4318 
4319     if (fname == NULL)
4320 	return (char_u *)"";
4321     for (p1 = p2 = fname; *p2; )	/* find last part of path */
4322     {
4323 	if (vim_ispathsep(*p2))
4324 	    p1 = p2 + 1;
4325 	mb_ptr_adv(p2);
4326     }
4327     return p1;
4328 }
4329 
4330 /*
4331  * Get pointer to tail of "fname", including path separators.  Putting a NUL
4332  * here leaves the directory name.  Takes care of "c:/" and "//".
4333  * Always returns a valid pointer.
4334  */
4335     char_u *
4336 gettail_sep(fname)
4337     char_u	*fname;
4338 {
4339     char_u	*p;
4340     char_u	*t;
4341 
4342     p = get_past_head(fname);	/* don't remove the '/' from "c:/file" */
4343     t = gettail(fname);
4344     while (t > p && after_pathsep(fname, t))
4345 	--t;
4346 #ifdef VMS
4347     /* path separator is part of the path */
4348     ++t;
4349 #endif
4350     return t;
4351 }
4352 
4353 /*
4354  * get the next path component (just after the next path separator).
4355  */
4356     char_u *
4357 getnextcomp(fname)
4358     char_u *fname;
4359 {
4360     while (*fname && !vim_ispathsep(*fname))
4361 	mb_ptr_adv(fname);
4362     if (*fname)
4363 	++fname;
4364     return fname;
4365 }
4366 
4367 /*
4368  * Get a pointer to one character past the head of a path name.
4369  * Unix: after "/"; DOS: after "c:\"; Amiga: after "disk:/"; Mac: no head.
4370  * If there is no head, path is returned.
4371  */
4372     char_u *
4373 get_past_head(path)
4374     char_u  *path;
4375 {
4376     char_u  *retval;
4377 
4378 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
4379     /* may skip "c:" */
4380     if (isalpha(path[0]) && path[1] == ':')
4381 	retval = path + 2;
4382     else
4383 	retval = path;
4384 #else
4385 # if defined(AMIGA)
4386     /* may skip "label:" */
4387     retval = vim_strchr(path, ':');
4388     if (retval == NULL)
4389 	retval = path;
4390 # else	/* Unix */
4391     retval = path;
4392 # endif
4393 #endif
4394 
4395     while (vim_ispathsep(*retval))
4396 	++retval;
4397 
4398     return retval;
4399 }
4400 
4401 /*
4402  * return TRUE if 'c' is a path separator.
4403  */
4404     int
4405 vim_ispathsep(c)
4406     int c;
4407 {
4408 #ifdef RISCOS
4409     return (c == '.' || c == ':');
4410 #else
4411 # ifdef UNIX
4412     return (c == '/');	    /* UNIX has ':' inside file names */
4413 # else
4414 #  ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
4415     return (c == ':' || c == '/' || c == '\\');
4416 #  else
4417 #   ifdef VMS
4418     /* server"user passwd"::device:[full.path.name]fname.extension;version" */
4419     return (c == ':' || c == '[' || c == ']' || c == '/'
4420 	    || c == '<' || c == '>' || c == '"' );
4421 #   else		/* Amiga */
4422     return (c == ':' || c == '/');
4423 #   endif /* VMS */
4424 #  endif
4425 # endif
4426 #endif /* RISC OS */
4427 }
4428 
4429 #if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH) || defined(PROTO)
4430 /*
4431  * return TRUE if 'c' is a path list separator.
4432  */
4433     int
4434 vim_ispathlistsep(c)
4435     int c;
4436 {
4437 #ifdef UNIX
4438     return (c == ':');
4439 #else
4440     return (c == ';');	/* might not be rigth for every system... */
4441 #endif
4442 }
4443 #endif
4444 
4445 /*
4446  * Return TRUE if the directory of "fname" exists, FALSE otherwise.
4447  * Also returns TRUE if there is no directory name.
4448  * "fname" must be writable!.
4449  */
4450     int
4451 dir_of_file_exists(fname)
4452     char_u	*fname;
4453 {
4454     char_u	*p;
4455     int		c;
4456     int		retval;
4457 
4458     p = gettail_sep(fname);
4459     if (p == fname)
4460 	return TRUE;
4461     c = *p;
4462     *p = NUL;
4463     retval = mch_isdir(fname);
4464     *p = c;
4465     return retval;
4466 }
4467 
4468 #if (defined(CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME) && defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME)) \
4469 	|| defined(PROTO)
4470 /*
4471  * Versions of fnamecmp() and fnamencmp() that handle '/' and '\' equally.
4472  */
4473     int
4474 vim_fnamecmp(x, y)
4475     char_u	*x, *y;
4476 {
4477     return vim_fnamencmp(x, y, MAXPATHL);
4478 }
4479 
4480     int
4481 vim_fnamencmp(x, y, len)
4482     char_u	*x, *y;
4483     size_t	len;
4484 {
4485     while (len > 0 && *x && *y)
4486     {
4487 	if (TOLOWER_LOC(*x) != TOLOWER_LOC(*y)
4488 		&& !(*x == '/' && *y == '\\')
4489 		&& !(*x == '\\' && *y == '/'))
4490 	    break;
4491 	++x;
4492 	++y;
4493 	--len;
4494     }
4495     if (len == 0)
4496 	return 0;
4497     return (*x - *y);
4498 }
4499 #endif
4500 
4501 /*
4502  * Concatenate file names fname1 and fname2 into allocated memory.
4503  * Only add a '/' or '\\' when 'sep' is TRUE and it is neccesary.
4504  */
4505     char_u  *
4506 concat_fnames(fname1, fname2, sep)
4507     char_u  *fname1;
4508     char_u  *fname2;
4509     int	    sep;
4510 {
4511     char_u  *dest;
4512 
4513     dest = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(fname1) + STRLEN(fname2) + 3));
4514     if (dest != NULL)
4515     {
4516 	STRCPY(dest, fname1);
4517 	if (sep)
4518 	    add_pathsep(dest);
4519 	STRCAT(dest, fname2);
4520     }
4521     return dest;
4522 }
4523 
4524 #if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(FEAT_GETTEXT) || defined(PROTO)
4525 /*
4526  * Concatenate two strings and return the result in allocated memory.
4527  * Returns NULL when out of memory.
4528  */
4529     char_u  *
4530 concat_str(str1, str2)
4531     char_u  *str1;
4532     char_u  *str2;
4533 {
4534     char_u  *dest;
4535     size_t  l = STRLEN(str1);
4536 
4537     dest = alloc((unsigned)(l + STRLEN(str2) + 1L));
4538     if (dest != NULL)
4539     {
4540 	STRCPY(dest, str1);
4541 	STRCPY(dest + l, str2);
4542     }
4543     return dest;
4544 }
4545 #endif
4546 
4547 /*
4548  * Add a path separator to a file name, unless it already ends in a path
4549  * separator.
4550  */
4551     void
4552 add_pathsep(p)
4553     char_u	*p;
4554 {
4555     if (*p != NUL && !after_pathsep(p, p + STRLEN(p)))
4556 	STRCAT(p, PATHSEPSTR);
4557 }
4558 
4559 /*
4560  * FullName_save - Make an allocated copy of a full file name.
4561  * Returns NULL when out of memory.
4562  */
4563     char_u  *
4564 FullName_save(fname, force)
4565     char_u	*fname;
4566     int		force;	    /* force expansion, even when it already looks
4567 			       like a full path name */
4568 {
4569     char_u	*buf;
4570     char_u	*new_fname = NULL;
4571 
4572     if (fname == NULL)
4573 	return NULL;
4574 
4575     buf = alloc((unsigned)MAXPATHL);
4576     if (buf != NULL)
4577     {
4578 	if (vim_FullName(fname, buf, MAXPATHL, force) != FAIL)
4579 	    new_fname = vim_strsave(buf);
4580 	else
4581 	    new_fname = vim_strsave(fname);
4582 	vim_free(buf);
4583     }
4584     return new_fname;
4585 }
4586 
4587 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SYN_HL)
4588 
4589 static char_u	*skip_string __ARGS((char_u *p));
4590 
4591 /*
4592  * Find the start of a comment, not knowing if we are in a comment right now.
4593  * Search starts at w_cursor.lnum and goes backwards.
4594  */
4595     pos_T *
4596 find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)	    /* XXX */
4597     int		ind_maxcomment;
4598 {
4599     pos_T	*pos;
4600     char_u	*line;
4601     char_u	*p;
4602 
4603     if ((pos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '*', FM_BACKWARD, ind_maxcomment)) == NULL)
4604 	return NULL;
4605 
4606     /*
4607      * Check if the comment start we found is inside a string.
4608      */
4609     line = ml_get(pos->lnum);
4610     for (p = line; *p && (unsigned)(p - line) < pos->col; ++p)
4611 	p = skip_string(p);
4612     if ((unsigned)(p - line) > pos->col)
4613 	return NULL;
4614     return pos;
4615 }
4616 
4617 /*
4618  * Skip to the end of a "string" and a 'c' character.
4619  * If there is no string or character, return argument unmodified.
4620  */
4621     static char_u *
4622 skip_string(p)
4623     char_u  *p;
4624 {
4625     int	    i;
4626 
4627     /*
4628      * We loop, because strings may be concatenated: "date""time".
4629      */
4630     for ( ; ; ++p)
4631     {
4632 	if (p[0] == '\'')		    /* 'c' or '\n' or '\000' */
4633 	{
4634 	    if (!p[1])			    /* ' at end of line */
4635 		break;
4636 	    i = 2;
4637 	    if (p[1] == '\\')		    /* '\n' or '\000' */
4638 	    {
4639 		++i;
4640 		while (vim_isdigit(p[i - 1]))   /* '\000' */
4641 		    ++i;
4642 	    }
4643 	    if (p[i] == '\'')		    /* check for trailing ' */
4644 	    {
4645 		p += i;
4646 		continue;
4647 	    }
4648 	}
4649 	else if (p[0] == '"')		    /* start of string */
4650 	{
4651 	    for (++p; p[0]; ++p)
4652 	    {
4653 		if (p[0] == '\\' && p[1] != NUL)
4654 		    ++p;
4655 		else if (p[0] == '"')	    /* end of string */
4656 		    break;
4657 	    }
4658 	    if (p[0] == '"')
4659 		continue;
4660 	}
4661 	break;				    /* no string found */
4662     }
4663     if (!*p)
4664 	--p;				    /* backup from NUL */
4665     return p;
4666 }
4667 #endif /* FEAT_CINDENT || FEAT_SYN_HL */
4668 
4669 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(PROTO)
4670 
4671 /*
4672  * Do C or expression indenting on the current line.
4673  */
4674     void
4675 do_c_expr_indent()
4676 {
4677 # ifdef FEAT_EVAL
4678     if (*curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL)
4679 	fixthisline(get_expr_indent);
4680     else
4681 # endif
4682 	fixthisline(get_c_indent);
4683 }
4684 
4685 /*
4686  * Functions for C-indenting.
4687  * Most of this originally comes from Eric Fischer.
4688  */
4689 /*
4690  * Below "XXX" means that this function may unlock the current line.
4691  */
4692 
4693 static char_u	*cin_skipcomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4694 static int	cin_nocode __ARGS((char_u *));
4695 static pos_T	*find_line_comment __ARGS((void));
4696 static int	cin_islabel_skip __ARGS((char_u **));
4697 static int	cin_isdefault __ARGS((char_u *));
4698 static char_u	*after_label __ARGS((char_u *l));
4699 static int	get_indent_nolabel __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
4700 static int	skip_label __ARGS((linenr_T, char_u **pp, int ind_maxcomment));
4701 static int	cin_first_id_amount __ARGS((void));
4702 static int	cin_get_equal_amount __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
4703 static int	cin_ispreproc __ARGS((char_u *));
4704 static int	cin_ispreproc_cont __ARGS((char_u **pp, linenr_T *lnump));
4705 static int	cin_iscomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4706 static int	cin_islinecomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4707 static int	cin_isterminated __ARGS((char_u *, int, int));
4708 static int	cin_isinit __ARGS((void));
4709 static int	cin_isfuncdecl __ARGS((char_u **, linenr_T));
4710 static int	cin_isif __ARGS((char_u *));
4711 static int	cin_iselse __ARGS((char_u *));
4712 static int	cin_isdo __ARGS((char_u *));
4713 static int	cin_iswhileofdo __ARGS((char_u *, linenr_T, int));
4714 static int	cin_isbreak __ARGS((char_u *));
4715 static int	cin_is_cpp_baseclass __ARGS((char_u *line, colnr_T *col));
4716 static int	cin_ends_in __ARGS((char_u *, char_u *, char_u *));
4717 static int	cin_skip2pos __ARGS((pos_T *trypos));
4718 static pos_T	*find_start_brace __ARGS((int));
4719 static pos_T	*find_match_paren __ARGS((int, int));
4720 static int	corr_ind_maxparen __ARGS((int ind_maxparen, pos_T *startpos));
4721 static int	find_last_paren __ARGS((char_u *l, int start, int end));
4722 static int	find_match __ARGS((int lookfor, linenr_T ourscope, int ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment));
4723 
4724 /*
4725  * Skip over white space and C comments within the line.
4726  */
4727     static char_u *
4728 cin_skipcomment(s)
4729     char_u	*s;
4730 {
4731     while (*s)
4732     {
4733 	s = skipwhite(s);
4734 	if (*s != '/')
4735 	    break;
4736 	++s;
4737 	if (*s == '/')		/* slash-slash comment continues till eol */
4738 	{
4739 	    s += STRLEN(s);
4740 	    break;
4741 	}
4742 	if (*s != '*')
4743 	    break;
4744 	for (++s; *s; ++s)	/* skip slash-star comment */
4745 	    if (s[0] == '*' && s[1] == '/')
4746 	    {
4747 		s += 2;
4748 		break;
4749 	    }
4750     }
4751     return s;
4752 }
4753 
4754 /*
4755  * Return TRUE if there there is no code at *s.  White space and comments are
4756  * not considered code.
4757  */
4758     static int
4759 cin_nocode(s)
4760     char_u	*s;
4761 {
4762     return *cin_skipcomment(s) == NUL;
4763 }
4764 
4765 /*
4766  * Check previous lines for a "//" line comment, skipping over blank lines.
4767  */
4768     static pos_T *
4769 find_line_comment() /* XXX */
4770 {
4771     static pos_T pos;
4772     char_u	 *line;
4773     char_u	 *p;
4774 
4775     pos = curwin->w_cursor;
4776     while (--pos.lnum > 0)
4777     {
4778 	line = ml_get(pos.lnum);
4779 	p = skipwhite(line);
4780 	if (cin_islinecomment(p))
4781 	{
4782 	    pos.col = (int)(p - line);
4783 	    return &pos;
4784 	}
4785 	if (*p != NUL)
4786 	    break;
4787     }
4788     return NULL;
4789 }
4790 
4791 /*
4792  * Check if string matches "label:"; move to character after ':' if true.
4793  */
4794     static int
4795 cin_islabel_skip(s)
4796     char_u	**s;
4797 {
4798     if (!vim_isIDc(**s))	    /* need at least one ID character */
4799 	return FALSE;
4800 
4801     while (vim_isIDc(**s))
4802 	(*s)++;
4803 
4804     *s = cin_skipcomment(*s);
4805 
4806     /* "::" is not a label, it's C++ */
4807     return (**s == ':' && *++*s != ':');
4808 }
4809 
4810 /*
4811  * Recognize a label: "label:".
4812  * Note: curwin->w_cursor must be where we are looking for the label.
4813  */
4814     int
4815 cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment)		/* XXX */
4816     int		ind_maxcomment;
4817 {
4818     char_u	*s;
4819 
4820     s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
4821 
4822     /*
4823      * Exclude "default" from labels, since it should be indented
4824      * like a switch label.  Same for C++ scope declarations.
4825      */
4826     if (cin_isdefault(s))
4827 	return FALSE;
4828     if (cin_isscopedecl(s))
4829 	return FALSE;
4830 
4831     if (cin_islabel_skip(&s))
4832     {
4833 	/*
4834 	 * Only accept a label if the previous line is terminated or is a case
4835 	 * label.
4836 	 */
4837 	pos_T	cursor_save;
4838 	pos_T	*trypos;
4839 	char_u	*line;
4840 
4841 	cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
4842 	while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
4843 	{
4844 	    --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
4845 
4846 	    /*
4847 	     * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
4848 	     */
4849 	    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
4850 	    if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
4851 		curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
4852 
4853 	    line = ml_get_curline();
4854 	    if (cin_ispreproc(line))	/* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */
4855 		continue;
4856 	    if (*(line = cin_skipcomment(line)) == NUL)
4857 		continue;
4858 
4859 	    curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4860 	    if (cin_isterminated(line, TRUE, FALSE)
4861 		    || cin_isscopedecl(line)
4862 		    || cin_iscase(line)
4863 		    || (cin_islabel_skip(&line) && cin_nocode(line)))
4864 		return TRUE;
4865 	    return FALSE;
4866 	}
4867 	curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4868 	return TRUE;		/* label at start of file??? */
4869     }
4870     return FALSE;
4871 }
4872 
4873 /*
4874  * Recognize structure initialization and enumerations.
4875  * Q&D-Implementation:
4876  * check for "=" at end or "[typedef] enum" at beginning of line.
4877  */
4878     static int
4879 cin_isinit(void)
4880 {
4881     char_u	*s;
4882 
4883     s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
4884 
4885     if (STRNCMP(s, "typedef", 7) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[7]))
4886 	s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7);
4887 
4888     if (STRNCMP(s, "enum", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4]))
4889 	return TRUE;
4890 
4891     if (cin_ends_in(s, (char_u *)"=", (char_u *)"{"))
4892 	return TRUE;
4893 
4894     return FALSE;
4895 }
4896 
4897 /*
4898  * Recognize a switch label: "case .*:" or "default:".
4899  */
4900      int
4901 cin_iscase(s)
4902     char_u *s;
4903 {
4904     s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4905     if (STRNCMP(s, "case", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4]))
4906     {
4907 	for (s += 4; *s; ++s)
4908 	{
4909 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4910 	    if (*s == ':')
4911 	    {
4912 		if (s[1] == ':')	/* skip over "::" for C++ */
4913 		    ++s;
4914 		else
4915 		    return TRUE;
4916 	    }
4917 	    if (*s == '\'' && s[1] && s[2] == '\'')
4918 		s += 2;			/* skip over '.' */
4919 	    else if (*s == '/' && (s[1] == '*' || s[1] == '/'))
4920 		return FALSE;		/* stop at comment */
4921 	    else if (*s == '"')
4922 		return FALSE;		/* stop at string */
4923 	}
4924 	return FALSE;
4925     }
4926 
4927     if (cin_isdefault(s))
4928 	return TRUE;
4929     return FALSE;
4930 }
4931 
4932 /*
4933  * Recognize a "default" switch label.
4934  */
4935     static int
4936 cin_isdefault(s)
4937     char_u  *s;
4938 {
4939     return (STRNCMP(s, "default", 7) == 0
4940 	    && *(s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7)) == ':'
4941 	    && s[1] != ':');
4942 }
4943 
4944 /*
4945  * Recognize a "public/private/proctected" scope declaration label.
4946  */
4947     int
4948 cin_isscopedecl(s)
4949     char_u	*s;
4950 {
4951     int		i;
4952 
4953     s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4954     if (STRNCMP(s, "public", 6) == 0)
4955 	i = 6;
4956     else if (STRNCMP(s, "protected", 9) == 0)
4957 	i = 9;
4958     else if (STRNCMP(s, "private", 7) == 0)
4959 	i = 7;
4960     else
4961 	return FALSE;
4962     return (*(s = cin_skipcomment(s + i)) == ':' && s[1] != ':');
4963 }
4964 
4965 /*
4966  * Return a pointer to the first non-empty non-comment character after a ':'.
4967  * Return NULL if not found.
4968  *	  case 234:    a = b;
4969  *		       ^
4970  */
4971     static char_u *
4972 after_label(l)
4973     char_u  *l;
4974 {
4975     for ( ; *l; ++l)
4976     {
4977 	if (*l == ':')
4978 	{
4979 	    if (l[1] == ':')	    /* skip over "::" for C++ */
4980 		++l;
4981 	    else if (!cin_iscase(l + 1))
4982 		break;
4983 	}
4984 	else if (*l == '\'' && l[1] && l[2] == '\'')
4985 	    l += 2;		    /* skip over 'x' */
4986     }
4987     if (*l == NUL)
4988 	return NULL;
4989     l = cin_skipcomment(l + 1);
4990     if (*l == NUL)
4991 	return NULL;
4992     return l;
4993 }
4994 
4995 /*
4996  * Get indent of line "lnum", skipping a label.
4997  * Return 0 if there is nothing after the label.
4998  */
4999     static int
5000 get_indent_nolabel(lnum)		/* XXX */
5001     linenr_T	lnum;
5002 {
5003     char_u	*l;
5004     pos_T	fp;
5005     colnr_T	col;
5006     char_u	*p;
5007 
5008     l = ml_get(lnum);
5009     p = after_label(l);
5010     if (p == NULL)
5011 	return 0;
5012 
5013     fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - l);
5014     fp.lnum = lnum;
5015     getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5016     return (int)col;
5017 }
5018 
5019 /*
5020  * Find indent for line "lnum", ignoring any case or jump label.
5021  * Also return a pointer to the text (after the label).
5022  *   label:	if (asdf && asdfasdf)
5023  *		^
5024  */
5025     static int
5026 skip_label(lnum, pp, ind_maxcomment)
5027     linenr_T	lnum;
5028     char_u	**pp;
5029     int		ind_maxcomment;
5030 {
5031     char_u	*l;
5032     int		amount;
5033     pos_T	cursor_save;
5034 
5035     cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5036     curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
5037     l = ml_get_curline();
5038 				    /* XXX */
5039     if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l) || cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
5040     {
5041 	amount = get_indent_nolabel(lnum);
5042 	l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
5043 	if (l == NULL)		/* just in case */
5044 	    l = ml_get_curline();
5045     }
5046     else
5047     {
5048 	amount = get_indent();
5049 	l = ml_get_curline();
5050     }
5051     *pp = l;
5052 
5053     curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5054     return amount;
5055 }
5056 
5057 /*
5058  * Return the indent of the first variable name after a type in a declaration.
5059  *  int	    a,			indent of "a"
5060  *  static struct foo    b,	indent of "b"
5061  *  enum bla    c,		indent of "c"
5062  * Returns zero when it doesn't look like a declaration.
5063  */
5064     static int
5065 cin_first_id_amount()
5066 {
5067     char_u	*line, *p, *s;
5068     int		len;
5069     pos_T	fp;
5070     colnr_T	col;
5071 
5072     line = ml_get_curline();
5073     p = skipwhite(line);
5074     len = skiptowhite(p) - p;
5075     if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "static", 6) == 0)
5076     {
5077 	p = skipwhite(p + 6);
5078 	len = skiptowhite(p) - p;
5079     }
5080     if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "struct", 6) == 0)
5081 	p = skipwhite(p + 6);
5082     else if (len == 4 && STRNCMP(p, "enum", 4) == 0)
5083 	p = skipwhite(p + 4);
5084     else if ((len == 8 && STRNCMP(p, "unsigned", 8) == 0)
5085 	    || (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "signed", 6) == 0))
5086     {
5087 	s = skipwhite(p + len);
5088 	if ((STRNCMP(s, "int", 3) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[3]))
5089 		|| (STRNCMP(s, "long", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4]))
5090 		|| (STRNCMP(s, "short", 5) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[5]))
5091 		|| (STRNCMP(s, "char", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4])))
5092 	    p = s;
5093     }
5094     for (len = 0; vim_isIDc(p[len]); ++len)
5095 	;
5096     if (len == 0 || !vim_iswhite(p[len]) || cin_nocode(p))
5097 	return 0;
5098 
5099     p = skipwhite(p + len);
5100     fp.lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5101     fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - line);
5102     getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5103     return (int)col;
5104 }
5105 
5106 /*
5107  * Return the indent of the first non-blank after an equal sign.
5108  *       char *foo = "here";
5109  * Return zero if no (useful) equal sign found.
5110  * Return -1 if the line above "lnum" ends in a backslash.
5111  *      foo = "asdf\
5112  *	       asdf\
5113  *	       here";
5114  */
5115     static int
5116 cin_get_equal_amount(lnum)
5117     linenr_T	lnum;
5118 {
5119     char_u	*line;
5120     char_u	*s;
5121     colnr_T	col;
5122     pos_T	fp;
5123 
5124     if (lnum > 1)
5125     {
5126 	line = ml_get(lnum - 1);
5127 	if (*line != NUL && line[STRLEN(line) - 1] == '\\')
5128 	    return -1;
5129     }
5130 
5131     line = s = ml_get(lnum);
5132     while (*s != NUL && vim_strchr((char_u *)"=;{}\"'", *s) == NULL)
5133     {
5134 	if (cin_iscomment(s))	/* ignore comments */
5135 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5136 	else
5137 	    ++s;
5138     }
5139     if (*s != '=')
5140 	return 0;
5141 
5142     s = skipwhite(s + 1);
5143     if (cin_nocode(s))
5144 	return 0;
5145 
5146     if (*s == '"')	/* nice alignment for continued strings */
5147 	++s;
5148 
5149     fp.lnum = lnum;
5150     fp.col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
5151     getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5152     return (int)col;
5153 }
5154 
5155 /*
5156  * Recognize a preprocessor statement: Any line that starts with '#'.
5157  */
5158     static int
5159 cin_ispreproc(s)
5160     char_u *s;
5161 {
5162     s = skipwhite(s);
5163     if (*s == '#')
5164 	return TRUE;
5165     return FALSE;
5166 }
5167 
5168 /*
5169  * Return TRUE if line "*pp" at "*lnump" is a preprocessor statement or a
5170  * continuation line of a preprocessor statement.  Decrease "*lnump" to the
5171  * start and return the line in "*pp".
5172  */
5173     static int
5174 cin_ispreproc_cont(pp, lnump)
5175     char_u	**pp;
5176     linenr_T	*lnump;
5177 {
5178     char_u	*line = *pp;
5179     linenr_T	lnum = *lnump;
5180     int		retval = FALSE;
5181 
5182     for (;;)
5183     {
5184 	if (cin_ispreproc(line))
5185 	{
5186 	    retval = TRUE;
5187 	    *lnump = lnum;
5188 	    break;
5189 	}
5190 	if (lnum == 1)
5191 	    break;
5192 	line = ml_get(--lnum);
5193 	if (*line == NUL || line[STRLEN(line) - 1] != '\\')
5194 	    break;
5195     }
5196 
5197     if (lnum != *lnump)
5198 	*pp = ml_get(*lnump);
5199     return retval;
5200 }
5201 
5202 /*
5203  * Recognize the start of a C or C++ comment.
5204  */
5205     static int
5206 cin_iscomment(p)
5207     char_u  *p;
5208 {
5209     return (p[0] == '/' && (p[1] == '*' || p[1] == '/'));
5210 }
5211 
5212 /*
5213  * Recognize the start of a "//" comment.
5214  */
5215     static int
5216 cin_islinecomment(p)
5217     char_u *p;
5218 {
5219     return (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '/');
5220 }
5221 
5222 /*
5223  * Recognize a line that starts with '{' or '}', or ends with ';', '{' or '}'.
5224  * Don't consider "} else" a terminated line.
5225  * Return the character terminating the line (ending char's have precedence if
5226  * both apply in order to determine initializations).
5227  */
5228     static int
5229 cin_isterminated(s, incl_open, incl_comma)
5230     char_u	*s;
5231     int		incl_open;	/* include '{' at the end as terminator */
5232     int		incl_comma;	/* recognize a trailing comma */
5233 {
5234     char_u found_start = 0;
5235 
5236     s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5237 
5238     if (*s == '{' || (*s == '}' && !cin_iselse(s)))
5239 	found_start = *s;
5240 
5241     while (*s)
5242     {
5243 	/* skip over comments, "" strings and 'c'haracters */
5244 	s = skip_string(cin_skipcomment(s));
5245 	if ((*s == ';' || (incl_open && *s == '{') || *s == '}'
5246 						 || (incl_comma && *s == ','))
5247 		&& cin_nocode(s + 1))
5248 	    return *s;
5249 
5250 	if (*s)
5251 	    s++;
5252     }
5253     return found_start;
5254 }
5255 
5256 /*
5257  * Recognize the basic picture of a function declaration -- it needs to
5258  * have an open paren somewhere and a close paren at the end of the line and
5259  * no semicolons anywhere.
5260  * When a line ends in a comma we continue looking in the next line.
5261  * "sp" points to a string with the line.  When looking at other lines it must
5262  * be restored to the line.  When it's NULL fetch lines here.
5263  * "lnum" is where we start looking.
5264  */
5265     static int
5266 cin_isfuncdecl(sp, first_lnum)
5267     char_u	**sp;
5268     linenr_T	first_lnum;
5269 {
5270     char_u	*s;
5271     linenr_T	lnum = first_lnum;
5272     int		retval = FALSE;
5273 
5274     if (sp == NULL)
5275 	s = ml_get(lnum);
5276     else
5277 	s = *sp;
5278 
5279     while (*s && *s != '(' && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
5280     {
5281 	if (cin_iscomment(s))	/* ignore comments */
5282 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5283 	else
5284 	    ++s;
5285     }
5286     if (*s != '(')
5287 	return FALSE;		/* ';', ' or "  before any () or no '(' */
5288 
5289     while (*s && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
5290     {
5291 	if (*s == ')' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5292 	{
5293 	    /* ')' at the end: may have found a match
5294 	     * Check for he previous line not to end in a backslash:
5295 	     *       #if defined(x) && \
5296 	     *		 defined(y)
5297 	     */
5298 	    lnum = first_lnum - 1;
5299 	    s = ml_get(lnum);
5300 	    if (*s == NUL || s[STRLEN(s) - 1] != '\\')
5301 		retval = TRUE;
5302 	    goto done;
5303 	}
5304 	if (*s == ',' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5305 	{
5306 	    /* ',' at the end: continue looking in the next line */
5307 	    if (lnum >= curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
5308 		break;
5309 
5310 	    s = ml_get(++lnum);
5311 	}
5312 	else if (cin_iscomment(s))	/* ignore comments */
5313 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5314 	else
5315 	    ++s;
5316     }
5317 
5318 done:
5319     if (lnum != first_lnum && sp != NULL)
5320 	*sp = ml_get(first_lnum);
5321 
5322     return retval;
5323 }
5324 
5325     static int
5326 cin_isif(p)
5327     char_u  *p;
5328 {
5329     return (STRNCMP(p, "if", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
5330 }
5331 
5332     static int
5333 cin_iselse(p)
5334     char_u  *p;
5335 {
5336     if (*p == '}')	    /* accept "} else" */
5337 	p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
5338     return (STRNCMP(p, "else", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[4]));
5339 }
5340 
5341     static int
5342 cin_isdo(p)
5343     char_u  *p;
5344 {
5345     return (STRNCMP(p, "do", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
5346 }
5347 
5348 /*
5349  * Check if this is a "while" that should have a matching "do".
5350  * We only accept a "while (condition) ;", with only white space between the
5351  * ')' and ';'. The condition may be spread over several lines.
5352  */
5353     static int
5354 cin_iswhileofdo(p, lnum, ind_maxparen)	    /* XXX */
5355     char_u	*p;
5356     linenr_T	lnum;
5357     int		ind_maxparen;
5358 {
5359     pos_T	cursor_save;
5360     pos_T	*trypos;
5361     int		retval = FALSE;
5362 
5363     p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5364     if (*p == '}')		/* accept "} while (cond);" */
5365 	p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
5366     if (STRNCMP(p, "while", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]))
5367     {
5368 	cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5369 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
5370 	curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
5371 	p = ml_get_curline();
5372 	while (*p && *p != 'w')	/* skip any '}', until the 'w' of the "while" */
5373 	{
5374 	    ++p;
5375 	    ++curwin->w_cursor.col;
5376 	}
5377 	if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, 0, 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL
5378 		&& *cin_skipcomment(ml_get_pos(trypos) + 1) == ';')
5379 	    retval = TRUE;
5380 	curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5381     }
5382     return retval;
5383 }
5384 
5385     static int
5386 cin_isbreak(p)
5387     char_u  *p;
5388 {
5389     return (STRNCMP(p, "break", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]));
5390 }
5391 
5392 /* Find the position of a C++ base-class declaration or
5393  * constructor-initialization. eg:
5394  *
5395  * class MyClass :
5396  *	baseClass		<-- here
5397  * class MyClass : public baseClass,
5398  *	anotherBaseClass	<-- here (should probably lineup ??)
5399  * MyClass::MyClass(...) :
5400  *	baseClass(...)		<-- here (constructor-initialization)
5401  */
5402     static int
5403 cin_is_cpp_baseclass(line, col)
5404     char_u	*line;
5405     colnr_T	*col;
5406 {
5407     char_u	*s;
5408     int		class_or_struct, lookfor_ctor_init, cpp_base_class;
5409 
5410     *col = 0;
5411 
5412     s = skipwhite(line);
5413     if (*s == '#')		/* skip #define FOO x ? (x) : x */
5414 	return FALSE;
5415     s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5416     if (*s == NUL)
5417 	return FALSE;
5418 
5419     cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5420 
5421     while(*s != NUL)
5422     {
5423 	if (s[0] == ':')
5424 	{
5425 	    if (s[1] == ':')
5426 	    {
5427 		/* skip double colon. It can't be a constructor
5428 		 * initialization any more */
5429 		lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5430 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 2);
5431 	    }
5432 	    else if (lookfor_ctor_init || class_or_struct)
5433 	    {
5434 		/* we have something found, that looks like the start of
5435 		 * cpp-base-class-declaration or contructor-initialization */
5436 		cpp_base_class = TRUE;
5437 		lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5438 		*col = 0;
5439 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5440 	    }
5441 	    else
5442 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5443 	}
5444 	else if ((STRNCMP(s, "class", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[5]))
5445 		|| (STRNCMP(s, "struct", 6) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[6])))
5446 	{
5447 	    class_or_struct = TRUE;
5448 	    lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5449 
5450 	    if (*s == 'c')
5451 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 5);
5452 	    else
5453 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 6);
5454 	}
5455 	else
5456 	{
5457 	    if (s[0] == '{' || s[0] == '}' || s[0] == ';')
5458 	    {
5459 		cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5460 	    }
5461 	    else if (s[0] == ')')
5462 	    {
5463 		/* Constructor-initialization is assumed if we come across
5464 		 * something like "):" */
5465 		class_or_struct = FALSE;
5466 		lookfor_ctor_init = TRUE;
5467 	    }
5468 	    else if (!vim_isIDc(s[0]))
5469 	    {
5470 		/* if it is not an identifier, we are wrong */
5471 		class_or_struct = FALSE;
5472 		lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5473 	    }
5474 	    else if (*col == 0)
5475 	    {
5476 		/* it can't be a constructor-initialization any more */
5477 		lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5478 
5479 		/* the first statement starts here: lineup with this one... */
5480 		if (cpp_base_class && *col == 0)
5481 		    *col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
5482 	    }
5483 
5484 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5485 	}
5486     }
5487 
5488     return cpp_base_class;
5489 }
5490 
5491 /*
5492  * Return TRUE if string "s" ends with the string "find", possibly followed by
5493  * white space and comments.  Skip strings and comments.
5494  * Ignore "ignore" after "find" if it's not NULL.
5495  */
5496     static int
5497 cin_ends_in(s, find, ignore)
5498     char_u	*s;
5499     char_u	*find;
5500     char_u	*ignore;
5501 {
5502     char_u	*p = s;
5503     char_u	*r;
5504     int		len = (int)STRLEN(find);
5505 
5506     while (*p != NUL)
5507     {
5508 	p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5509 	if (STRNCMP(p, find, len) == 0)
5510 	{
5511 	    r = skipwhite(p + len);
5512 	    if (ignore != NULL && STRNCMP(r, ignore, STRLEN(ignore)) == 0)
5513 		r = skipwhite(r + STRLEN(ignore));
5514 	    if (cin_nocode(r))
5515 		return TRUE;
5516 	}
5517 	if (*p != NUL)
5518 	    ++p;
5519     }
5520     return FALSE;
5521 }
5522 
5523 /*
5524  * Skip strings, chars and comments until at or past "trypos".
5525  * Return the column found.
5526  */
5527     static int
5528 cin_skip2pos(trypos)
5529     pos_T	*trypos;
5530 {
5531     char_u	*line;
5532     char_u	*p;
5533 
5534     p = line = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
5535     while (*p && (colnr_T)(p - line) < trypos->col)
5536     {
5537 	if (cin_iscomment(p))
5538 	    p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5539 	else
5540 	{
5541 	    p = skip_string(p);
5542 	    ++p;
5543 	}
5544     }
5545     return (int)(p - line);
5546 }
5547 
5548 /*
5549  * Find the '{' at the start of the block we are in.
5550  * Return NULL if no match found.
5551  * Ignore a '{' that is in a comment, makes indenting the next three lines
5552  * work. */
5553 /* foo()    */
5554 /* {	    */
5555 /* }	    */
5556 
5557     static pos_T *
5558 find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)	    /* XXX */
5559     int		ind_maxcomment;
5560 {
5561     pos_T	cursor_save;
5562     pos_T	*trypos;
5563     pos_T	*pos;
5564     static pos_T	pos_copy;
5565 
5566     cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5567     while ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '{', FM_BLOCKSTOP, 0)) != NULL)
5568     {
5569 	pos_copy = *trypos;	/* copy pos_T, next findmatch will change it */
5570 	trypos = &pos_copy;
5571 	curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5572 	pos = NULL;
5573 	/* ignore the { if it's in a // comment */
5574 	if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) == trypos->col
5575 		&& (pos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) == NULL) /* XXX */
5576 	    break;
5577 	if (pos != NULL)
5578 	    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
5579     }
5580     curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5581     return trypos;
5582 }
5583 
5584 /*
5585  * Find the matching '(', failing if it is in a comment.
5586  * Return NULL of no match found.
5587  */
5588     static pos_T *
5589 find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)	    /* XXX */
5590     int		ind_maxparen;
5591     int		ind_maxcomment;
5592 {
5593     pos_T	cursor_save;
5594     pos_T	*trypos;
5595     static pos_T	pos_copy;
5596 
5597     cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5598     if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '(', 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL)
5599     {
5600 	/* check if the ( is in a // comment */
5601 	if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) > trypos->col)
5602 	    trypos = NULL;
5603 	else
5604 	{
5605 	    pos_copy = *trypos;	    /* copy trypos, findmatch will change it */
5606 	    trypos = &pos_copy;
5607 	    curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5608 	    if (find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) != NULL) /* XXX */
5609 		trypos = NULL;
5610 	}
5611     }
5612     curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5613     return trypos;
5614 }
5615 
5616 /*
5617  * Return ind_maxparen corrected for the difference in line number between the
5618  * cursor position and "startpos".  This makes sure that searching for a
5619  * matching paren above the cursor line doesn't find a match because of
5620  * looking a few lines further.
5621  */
5622     static int
5623 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, startpos)
5624     int		ind_maxparen;
5625     pos_T	*startpos;
5626 {
5627     long	n = (long)startpos->lnum - (long)curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5628 
5629     if (n > 0 && n < ind_maxparen / 2)
5630 	return ind_maxparen - (int)n;
5631     return ind_maxparen;
5632 }
5633 
5634 /*
5635  * Set w_cursor.col to the column number of the last unmatched ')' or '{' in
5636  * line "l".
5637  */
5638     static int
5639 find_last_paren(l, start, end)
5640     char_u	*l;
5641     int		start, end;
5642 {
5643     int		i;
5644     int		retval = FALSE;
5645     int		open_count = 0;
5646 
5647     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;		    /* default is start of line */
5648 
5649     for (i = 0; l[i]; i++)
5650     {
5651 	i = (int)(cin_skipcomment(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in comments */
5652 	i = (int)(skip_string(l + i) - l);    /* ignore parens in quotes */
5653 	if (l[i] == start)
5654 	    ++open_count;
5655 	else if (l[i] == end)
5656 	{
5657 	    if (open_count > 0)
5658 		--open_count;
5659 	    else
5660 	    {
5661 		curwin->w_cursor.col = i;
5662 		retval = TRUE;
5663 	    }
5664 	}
5665     }
5666     return retval;
5667 }
5668 
5669     int
5670 get_c_indent()
5671 {
5672     /*
5673      * spaces from a block's opening brace the prevailing indent for that
5674      * block should be
5675      */
5676     int ind_level = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5677 
5678     /*
5679      * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace that's at the end of a
5680      * line is imagined to be.
5681      */
5682     int ind_open_imag = 0;
5683 
5684     /*
5685      * spaces from the prevailing indent for a line that is not precededof by
5686      * an opening brace.
5687      */
5688     int ind_no_brace = 0;
5689 
5690     /*
5691      * column where the first { of a function should be located }
5692      */
5693     int ind_first_open = 0;
5694 
5695     /*
5696      * spaces from the prevailing indent a leftmost open brace should be
5697      * located
5698      */
5699     int ind_open_extra = 0;
5700 
5701     /*
5702      * spaces from the matching open brace (real location for one at the left
5703      * edge; imaginary location from one that ends a line) the matching close
5704      * brace should be located
5705      */
5706     int ind_close_extra = 0;
5707 
5708     /*
5709      * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace sitting in the leftmost
5710      * column is imagined to be
5711      */
5712     int ind_open_left_imag = 0;
5713 
5714     /*
5715      * spaces from the switch() indent a "case xx" label should be located
5716      */
5717     int ind_case = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5718 
5719     /*
5720      * spaces from the "case xx:" code after a switch() should be located
5721      */
5722     int ind_case_code = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5723 
5724     /*
5725      * lineup break at end of case in switch() with case label
5726      */
5727     int ind_case_break = 0;
5728 
5729     /*
5730      * spaces from the class declaration indent a scope declaration label
5731      * should be located
5732      */
5733     int ind_scopedecl = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5734 
5735     /*
5736      * spaces from the scope declaration label code should be located
5737      */
5738     int ind_scopedecl_code = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5739 
5740     /*
5741      * amount K&R-style parameters should be indented
5742      */
5743     int ind_param = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5744 
5745     /*
5746      * amount a function type spec should be indented
5747      */
5748     int ind_func_type = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5749 
5750     /*
5751      * amount a cpp base class declaration or constructor initialization
5752      * should be indented
5753      */
5754     int ind_cpp_baseclass = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5755 
5756     /*
5757      * additional spaces beyond the prevailing indent a continuation line
5758      * should be located
5759      */
5760     int ind_continuation = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5761 
5762     /*
5763      * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses
5764      */
5765     int ind_unclosed = curbuf->b_p_sw * 2;
5766 
5767     /*
5768      * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses, which
5769      * itself is also unclosed
5770      */
5771     int ind_unclosed2 = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5772 
5773     /*
5774      * suppress ignoring spaces from the indent of a line starting with an
5775      * unclosed parentheses.
5776      */
5777     int ind_unclosed_noignore = 0;
5778 
5779     /*
5780      * If the opening paren is the last nonwhite character on the line, and
5781      * ind_unclosed_wrapped is nonzero, use this indent relative to the outer
5782      * context (for very long lines).
5783      */
5784     int ind_unclosed_wrapped = 0;
5785 
5786     /*
5787      * suppress ignoring white space when lining up with the character after
5788      * an unclosed parentheses.
5789      */
5790     int ind_unclosed_whiteok = 0;
5791 
5792     /*
5793      * indent a closing parentheses under the line start of the matching
5794      * opening parentheses.
5795      */
5796     int ind_matching_paren = 0;
5797 
5798     /*
5799      * Extra indent for comments.
5800      */
5801     int ind_comment = 0;
5802 
5803     /*
5804      * spaces from the comment opener when there is nothing after it.
5805      */
5806     int ind_in_comment = 3;
5807 
5808     /*
5809      * boolean: if non-zero, use ind_in_comment even if there is something
5810      * after the comment opener.
5811      */
5812     int ind_in_comment2 = 0;
5813 
5814     /*
5815      * max lines to search for an open paren
5816      */
5817     int ind_maxparen = 20;
5818 
5819     /*
5820      * max lines to search for an open comment
5821      */
5822     int ind_maxcomment = 70;
5823 
5824     /*
5825      * handle braces for java code
5826      */
5827     int	ind_java = 0;
5828 
5829     /*
5830      * handle blocked cases correctly
5831      */
5832     int ind_keep_case_label = 0;
5833 
5834     pos_T	cur_curpos;
5835     int		amount;
5836     int		scope_amount;
5837     int		cur_amount;
5838     colnr_T	col;
5839     char_u	*theline;
5840     char_u	*linecopy;
5841     pos_T	*trypos;
5842     pos_T	*tryposBrace = NULL;
5843     pos_T	our_paren_pos;
5844     char_u	*start;
5845     int		start_brace;
5846 #define BRACE_IN_COL0		1	    /* '{' is in comumn 0 */
5847 #define BRACE_AT_START		2	    /* '{' is at start of line */
5848 #define BRACE_AT_END		3	    /* '{' is at end of line */
5849     linenr_T	ourscope;
5850     char_u	*l;
5851     char_u	*look;
5852     char_u	terminated;
5853     int		lookfor;
5854 #define LOOKFOR_INITIAL		0
5855 #define LOOKFOR_IF		1
5856 #define LOOKFOR_DO		2
5857 #define LOOKFOR_CASE		3
5858 #define LOOKFOR_ANY		4
5859 #define LOOKFOR_TERM		5
5860 #define LOOKFOR_UNTERM		6
5861 #define LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL	7
5862 #define LOOKFOR_NOBREAK		8
5863 #define LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS	9
5864 #define LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT	10
5865 
5866     int		whilelevel;
5867     linenr_T	lnum;
5868     char_u	*options;
5869     int		fraction = 0;	    /* init for GCC */
5870     int		divider;
5871     int		n;
5872     int		iscase;
5873     int		lookfor_break;
5874     int		cont_amount = 0;    /* amount for continuation line */
5875 
5876     for (options = curbuf->b_p_cino; *options; )
5877     {
5878 	l = options++;
5879 	if (*options == '-')
5880 	    ++options;
5881 	n = getdigits(&options);
5882 	divider = 0;
5883 	if (*options == '.')	    /* ".5s" means a fraction */
5884 	{
5885 	    fraction = atol((char *)++options);
5886 	    while (VIM_ISDIGIT(*options))
5887 	    {
5888 		++options;
5889 		if (divider)
5890 		    divider *= 10;
5891 		else
5892 		    divider = 10;
5893 	    }
5894 	}
5895 	if (*options == 's')	    /* "2s" means two times 'shiftwidth' */
5896 	{
5897 	    if (n == 0 && fraction == 0)
5898 		n = curbuf->b_p_sw;	/* just "s" is one 'shiftwidth' */
5899 	    else
5900 	    {
5901 		n *= curbuf->b_p_sw;
5902 		if (divider)
5903 		    n += (curbuf->b_p_sw * fraction + divider / 2) / divider;
5904 	    }
5905 	    ++options;
5906 	}
5907 	if (l[1] == '-')
5908 	    n = -n;
5909 	/* When adding an entry here, also update the default 'cinoptions' in
5910 	 * change.txt, and add explanation for it! */
5911 	switch (*l)
5912 	{
5913 	    case '>': ind_level = n; break;
5914 	    case 'e': ind_open_imag = n; break;
5915 	    case 'n': ind_no_brace = n; break;
5916 	    case 'f': ind_first_open = n; break;
5917 	    case '{': ind_open_extra = n; break;
5918 	    case '}': ind_close_extra = n; break;
5919 	    case '^': ind_open_left_imag = n; break;
5920 	    case ':': ind_case = n; break;
5921 	    case '=': ind_case_code = n; break;
5922 	    case 'b': ind_case_break = n; break;
5923 	    case 'p': ind_param = n; break;
5924 	    case 't': ind_func_type = n; break;
5925 	    case '/': ind_comment = n; break;
5926 	    case 'c': ind_in_comment = n; break;
5927 	    case 'C': ind_in_comment2 = n; break;
5928 	    case 'i': ind_cpp_baseclass = n; break;
5929 	    case '+': ind_continuation = n; break;
5930 	    case '(': ind_unclosed = n; break;
5931 	    case 'u': ind_unclosed2 = n; break;
5932 	    case 'U': ind_unclosed_noignore = n; break;
5933 	    case 'W': ind_unclosed_wrapped = n; break;
5934 	    case 'w': ind_unclosed_whiteok = n; break;
5935 	    case 'm': ind_matching_paren = n; break;
5936 	    case ')': ind_maxparen = n; break;
5937 	    case '*': ind_maxcomment = n; break;
5938 	    case 'g': ind_scopedecl = n; break;
5939 	    case 'h': ind_scopedecl_code = n; break;
5940 	    case 'j': ind_java = n; break;
5941 	    case 'l': ind_keep_case_label = n; break;
5942 	}
5943     }
5944 
5945     /* remember where the cursor was when we started */
5946     cur_curpos = curwin->w_cursor;
5947 
5948     /* Get a copy of the current contents of the line.
5949      * This is required, because only the most recent line obtained with
5950      * ml_get is valid! */
5951     linecopy = vim_strsave(ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum));
5952     if (linecopy == NULL)
5953 	return 0;
5954 
5955     /*
5956      * In insert mode and the cursor is on a ')' truncate the line at the
5957      * cursor position.  We don't want to line up with the matching '(' when
5958      * inserting new stuff.
5959      * For unknown reasons the cursor might be past the end of the line, thus
5960      * check for that.
5961      */
5962     if ((State & INSERT)
5963 	    && curwin->w_cursor.col < STRLEN(linecopy)
5964 	    && linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] == ')')
5965 	linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
5966 
5967     theline = skipwhite(linecopy);
5968 
5969     /* move the cursor to the start of the line */
5970 
5971     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
5972 
5973     /*
5974      * #defines and so on always go at the left when included in 'cinkeys'.
5975      */
5976     if (*theline == '#' && (*linecopy == '#' || in_cinkeys('#', ' ', TRUE)))
5977     {
5978 	amount = 0;
5979     }
5980 
5981     /*
5982      * Is it a non-case label?	Then that goes at the left margin too.
5983      */
5984     else if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))	    /* XXX */
5985     {
5986 	amount = 0;
5987     }
5988 
5989     /*
5990      * If we're inside a "//" comment and there is a "//" comment in a
5991      * previous line, lineup with that one.
5992      */
5993     else if (cin_islinecomment(theline)
5994 	    && (trypos = find_line_comment()) != NULL) /* XXX */
5995     {
5996 	/* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
5997 	getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
5998 	amount = col;
5999     }
6000 
6001     /*
6002      * If we're inside a comment and not looking at the start of the
6003      * comment, try using the 'comments' option.
6004      */
6005     else if (!cin_iscomment(theline)
6006 	    && (trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
6007     {
6008 	int	lead_start_len = 2;
6009 	int	lead_middle_len = 1;
6010 	char_u	lead_start[COM_MAX_LEN];	/* start-comment string */
6011 	char_u	lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN];	/* middle-comment string */
6012 	char_u	lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN];		/* end-comment string */
6013 	char_u	*p;
6014 	int	start_align = 0;
6015 	int	start_off = 0;
6016 	int	done = FALSE;
6017 
6018 	/* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
6019 	getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6020 	amount = col;
6021 
6022 	p = curbuf->b_p_com;
6023 	while (*p != NUL)
6024 	{
6025 	    int	align = 0;
6026 	    int	off = 0;
6027 	    int what = 0;
6028 
6029 	    while (*p != NUL && *p != ':')
6030 	    {
6031 		if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_END || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
6032 		    what = *p++;
6033 		else if (*p == COM_LEFT || *p == COM_RIGHT)
6034 		    align = *p++;
6035 		else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
6036 		    off = getdigits(&p);
6037 		else
6038 		    ++p;
6039 	    }
6040 
6041 	    if (*p == ':')
6042 		++p;
6043 	    (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
6044 	    if (what == COM_START)
6045 	    {
6046 		STRCPY(lead_start, lead_end);
6047 		lead_start_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_start);
6048 		start_off = off;
6049 		start_align = align;
6050 	    }
6051 	    else if (what == COM_MIDDLE)
6052 	    {
6053 		STRCPY(lead_middle, lead_end);
6054 		lead_middle_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
6055 	    }
6056 	    else if (what == COM_END)
6057 	    {
6058 		/* If our line starts with the middle comment string, line it
6059 		 * up with the comment opener per the 'comments' option. */
6060 		if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) == 0
6061 			&& STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) != 0)
6062 		{
6063 		    done = TRUE;
6064 		    if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
6065 		    {
6066 			/* If the start comment string matches in the previous
6067 			 * line, use the indent of that line pluss offset.  If
6068 			 * the middle comment string matches in the previous
6069 			 * line, use the indent of that line.  XXX */
6070 			look = skipwhite(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1));
6071 			if (STRNCMP(look, lead_start, lead_start_len) == 0)
6072 			    amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6073 			else if (STRNCMP(look, lead_middle,
6074 							lead_middle_len) == 0)
6075 			{
6076 			    amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6077 			    break;
6078 			}
6079 			/* If the start comment string doesn't match with the
6080 			 * start of the comment, skip this entry. XXX */
6081 			else if (STRNCMP(ml_get(trypos->lnum) + trypos->col,
6082 					     lead_start, lead_start_len) != 0)
6083 			    continue;
6084 		    }
6085 		    if (start_off != 0)
6086 			amount += start_off;
6087 		    else if (start_align == COM_RIGHT)
6088 			amount += vim_strsize(lead_start)
6089 						   - vim_strsize(lead_middle);
6090 		    break;
6091 		}
6092 
6093 		/* If our line starts with the end comment string, line it up
6094 		 * with the middle comment */
6095 		if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) != 0
6096 			&& STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) == 0)
6097 		{
6098 		    amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6099 								     /* XXX */
6100 		    if (off != 0)
6101 			amount += off;
6102 		    else if (align == COM_RIGHT)
6103 			amount += vim_strsize(lead_start)
6104 						   - vim_strsize(lead_middle);
6105 		    done = TRUE;
6106 		    break;
6107 		}
6108 	    }
6109 	}
6110 
6111 	/* If our line starts with an asterisk, line up with the
6112 	 * asterisk in the comment opener; otherwise, line up
6113 	 * with the first character of the comment text.
6114 	 */
6115 	if (done)
6116 	    ;
6117 	else if (theline[0] == '*')
6118 	    amount += 1;
6119 	else
6120 	{
6121 	    /*
6122 	     * If we are more than one line away from the comment opener, take
6123 	     * the indent of the previous non-empty line.  If 'cino' has "CO"
6124 	     * and we are just below the comment opener and there are any
6125 	     * white characters after it line up with the text after it;
6126 	     * otherwise, add the amount specified by "c" in 'cino'
6127 	     */
6128 	    amount = -1;
6129 	    for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > trypos->lnum; --lnum)
6130 	    {
6131 		if (linewhite(lnum))		    /* skip blank lines */
6132 		    continue;
6133 		amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum);	    /* XXX */
6134 		break;
6135 	    }
6136 	    if (amount == -1)			    /* use the comment opener */
6137 	    {
6138 		if (!ind_in_comment2)
6139 		{
6140 		    start = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
6141 		    look = start + trypos->col + 2; /* skip / and * */
6142 		    if (*look != NUL)		    /* if something after it */
6143 			trypos->col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(look) - start);
6144 		}
6145 		getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6146 		amount = col;
6147 		if (ind_in_comment2 || *look == NUL)
6148 		    amount += ind_in_comment;
6149 	    }
6150 	}
6151     }
6152 
6153     /*
6154      * Are we inside parentheses or braces?
6155      */						    /* XXX */
6156     else if (((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6157 		&& ind_java == 0)
6158 	    || (tryposBrace = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6159 	    || trypos != NULL)
6160     {
6161       if (trypos != NULL && tryposBrace != NULL)
6162       {
6163 	  /* Both an unmatched '(' and '{' is found.  Use the one which is
6164 	   * closer to the current cursor position, set the other to NULL. */
6165 	  if (trypos->lnum != tryposBrace->lnum
6166 		  ? trypos->lnum < tryposBrace->lnum
6167 		  : trypos->col < tryposBrace->col)
6168 	      trypos = NULL;
6169 	  else
6170 	      tryposBrace = NULL;
6171       }
6172 
6173       if (trypos != NULL)
6174       {
6175 	/*
6176 	 * If the matching paren is more than one line away, use the indent of
6177 	 * a previous non-empty line that matches the same paren.
6178 	 */
6179 	amount = -1;
6180 	cur_amount = MAXCOL;
6181 	our_paren_pos = *trypos;
6182 	for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > our_paren_pos.lnum; --lnum)
6183 	{
6184 	    l = skipwhite(ml_get(lnum));
6185 	    if (cin_nocode(l))		/* skip comment lines */
6186 		continue;
6187 	    if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &lnum))	/* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */
6188 		continue;
6189 	    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
6190 
6191 	    /* Skip a comment. XXX */
6192 	    if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6193 	    {
6194 		lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6195 		continue;
6196 	    }
6197 
6198 	    /* XXX */
6199 	    if ((trypos = find_match_paren(
6200 			    corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
6201 						      ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6202 		    && trypos->lnum == our_paren_pos.lnum
6203 		    && trypos->col == our_paren_pos.col)
6204 	    {
6205 		    amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum);	/* XXX */
6206 
6207 		    if (theline[0] == ')')
6208 		    {
6209 			if (our_paren_pos.lnum != lnum && cur_amount > amount)
6210 			    cur_amount = amount;
6211 			amount = -1;
6212 		    }
6213 		break;
6214 	    }
6215 	}
6216 
6217 	/*
6218 	 * Line up with line where the matching paren is. XXX
6219 	 * If the line starts with a '(' or the indent for unclosed
6220 	 * parentheses is zero, line up with the unclosed parentheses.
6221 	 */
6222 	if (amount == -1)
6223 	{
6224 	    amount = skip_label(our_paren_pos.lnum, &look, ind_maxcomment);
6225 	    if (theline[0] == ')' || ind_unclosed == 0
6226 		       || (!ind_unclosed_noignore && *skipwhite(look) == '('))
6227 	    {
6228 		/*
6229 		 * If we're looking at a close paren, line up right there;
6230 		 * otherwise, line up with the next (non-white) character.
6231 		 * When ind_unclosed_wrapped is set and the matching paren is
6232 		 * the last nonwhite character of the line, use either the
6233 		 * indent of the current line or the indentation of the next
6234 		 * outer paren and add ind_unclosed_wrapped (for very long
6235 		 * lines).
6236 		 */
6237 		if (theline[0] != ')')
6238 		{
6239 		    cur_amount = MAXCOL;
6240 		    l = ml_get(our_paren_pos.lnum);
6241 		    if (ind_unclosed_wrapped
6242 				       && cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"(", NULL))
6243 		    {
6244 			/* look for opening unmatched paren, indent one level
6245 			 * for each additional level */
6246 			n = 1;
6247 			for (col = 0; col < our_paren_pos.col; ++col)
6248 			{
6249 			    switch (l[col])
6250 			    {
6251 				case '(':
6252 				case '{': ++n;
6253 					  break;
6254 
6255 				case ')':
6256 				case '}': if (n > 1)
6257 					      --n;
6258 					  break;
6259 			    }
6260 			}
6261 
6262 			our_paren_pos.col = 0;
6263 			amount += n * ind_unclosed_wrapped;
6264 		    }
6265 		    else if (ind_unclosed_whiteok)
6266 			our_paren_pos.col++;
6267 		    else
6268 		    {
6269 			col = our_paren_pos.col + 1;
6270 			while (vim_iswhite(l[col]))
6271 			    col++;
6272 			if (l[col] != NUL)	/* In case of trailing space */
6273 			    our_paren_pos.col = col;
6274 			else
6275 			    our_paren_pos.col++;
6276 		    }
6277 		}
6278 
6279 		/*
6280 		 * Find how indented the paren is, or the character after it
6281 		 * if we did the above "if".
6282 		 */
6283 		if (our_paren_pos.col > 0)
6284 		{
6285 		    getvcol(curwin, &our_paren_pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6286 		    if (cur_amount > (int)col)
6287 			cur_amount = col;
6288 		}
6289 	    }
6290 
6291 	    if (theline[0] == ')' && ind_matching_paren)
6292 	    {
6293 		/* Line up with the start of the matching paren line. */
6294 	    }
6295 	    else if (ind_unclosed == 0 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore
6296 						  && *skipwhite(look) == '('))
6297 	    {
6298 		if (cur_amount != MAXCOL)
6299 		    amount = cur_amount;
6300 	    }
6301 	    else
6302 	    {
6303 		/* add ind_unclosed2 for each '(' before our matching one */
6304 		col = our_paren_pos.col;
6305 		while (our_paren_pos.col > 0)
6306 		{
6307 		    --our_paren_pos.col;
6308 		    switch (*ml_get_pos(&our_paren_pos))
6309 		    {
6310 			case '(': amount += ind_unclosed2;
6311 				  col = our_paren_pos.col;
6312 				  break;
6313 			case ')': amount -= ind_unclosed2;
6314 				  col = MAXCOL;
6315 				  break;
6316 		    }
6317 		}
6318 
6319 		/* Use ind_unclosed once, when the first '(' is not inside
6320 		 * braces */
6321 		if (col == MAXCOL)
6322 		    amount += ind_unclosed;
6323 		else
6324 		{
6325 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = our_paren_pos.lnum;
6326 		    curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
6327 		    if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6328 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6329 			amount += ind_unclosed2;
6330 		    else
6331 			amount += ind_unclosed;
6332 		}
6333 		/*
6334 		 * For a line starting with ')' use the minimum of the two
6335 		 * positions, to avoid giving it more indent than the previous
6336 		 * lines:
6337 		 *  func_long_name(		    if (x
6338 		 *	arg				    && yy
6339 		 *	)	  ^ not here	       )    ^ not here
6340 		 */
6341 		if (cur_amount < amount)
6342 		    amount = cur_amount;
6343 	    }
6344 	}
6345 
6346 	/* add extra indent for a comment */
6347 	if (cin_iscomment(theline))
6348 	    amount += ind_comment;
6349       }
6350 
6351       /*
6352        * Are we at least inside braces, then?
6353        */
6354       else
6355       {
6356 	trypos = tryposBrace;
6357 
6358 	ourscope = trypos->lnum;
6359 	start = ml_get(ourscope);
6360 
6361 	/*
6362 	 * Now figure out how indented the line is in general.
6363 	 * If the brace was at the start of the line, we use that;
6364 	 * otherwise, check out the indentation of the line as
6365 	 * a whole and then add the "imaginary indent" to that.
6366 	 */
6367 	look = skipwhite(start);
6368 	if (*look == '{')
6369 	{
6370 	    getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6371 	    amount = col;
6372 	    if (*start == '{')
6373 		start_brace = BRACE_IN_COL0;
6374 	    else
6375 		start_brace = BRACE_AT_START;
6376 	}
6377 	else
6378 	{
6379 	    /*
6380 	     * that opening brace might have been on a continuation
6381 	     * line.  if so, find the start of the line.
6382 	     */
6383 	    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = ourscope;
6384 
6385 	    /*
6386 	     * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
6387 	     * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
6388 	     */
6389 	    lnum = ourscope;
6390 	    if (find_last_paren(start, '(', ')')
6391 		    && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6392 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6393 		lnum = trypos->lnum;
6394 
6395 	    /*
6396 	     * It could have been something like
6397 	     *	   case 1: if (asdf &&
6398 	     *			ldfd) {
6399 	     *		    }
6400 	     */
6401 	    if (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(skipwhite(ml_get_curline())))
6402 		amount = get_indent();
6403 	    else
6404 		amount = skip_label(lnum, &l, ind_maxcomment);
6405 
6406 	    start_brace = BRACE_AT_END;
6407 	}
6408 
6409 	/*
6410 	 * if we're looking at a closing brace, that's where
6411 	 * we want to be.  otherwise, add the amount of room
6412 	 * that an indent is supposed to be.
6413 	 */
6414 	if (theline[0] == '}')
6415 	{
6416 	    /*
6417 	     * they may want closing braces to line up with something
6418 	     * other than the open brace.  indulge them, if so.
6419 	     */
6420 	    amount += ind_close_extra;
6421 	}
6422 	else
6423 	{
6424 	    /*
6425 	     * If we're looking at an "else", try to find an "if"
6426 	     * to match it with.
6427 	     * If we're looking at a "while", try to find a "do"
6428 	     * to match it with.
6429 	     */
6430 	    lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
6431 	    if (cin_iselse(theline))
6432 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_IF;
6433 	    else if (cin_iswhileofdo(theline, cur_curpos.lnum, ind_maxparen))
6434 								    /* XXX */
6435 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_DO;
6436 	    if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_INITIAL)
6437 	    {
6438 		curwin->w_cursor.lnum = cur_curpos.lnum;
6439 		if (find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen,
6440 							ind_maxcomment) == OK)
6441 		{
6442 		    amount = get_indent();	/* XXX */
6443 		    goto theend;
6444 		}
6445 	    }
6446 
6447 	    /*
6448 	     * We get here if we are not on an "while-of-do" or "else" (or
6449 	     * failed to find a matching "if").
6450 	     * Search backwards for something to line up with.
6451 	     * First set amount for when we don't find anything.
6452 	     */
6453 
6454 	    /*
6455 	     * if the '{' is  _really_ at the left margin, use the imaginary
6456 	     * location of a left-margin brace.  Otherwise, correct the
6457 	     * location for ind_open_extra.
6458 	     */
6459 
6460 	    if (start_brace == BRACE_IN_COL0)	    /* '{' is in column 0 */
6461 	    {
6462 		amount = ind_open_left_imag;
6463 	    }
6464 	    else
6465 	    {
6466 		if (start_brace == BRACE_AT_END)    /* '{' is at end of line */
6467 		    amount += ind_open_imag;
6468 		else
6469 		{
6470 		    /* Compensate for adding ind_open_extra later. */
6471 		    amount -= ind_open_extra;
6472 		    if (amount < 0)
6473 			amount = 0;
6474 		}
6475 	    }
6476 
6477 	    lookfor_break = FALSE;
6478 
6479 	    if (cin_iscase(theline))	/* it's a switch() label */
6480 	    {
6481 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_CASE;	/* find a previous switch() label */
6482 		amount += ind_case;
6483 	    }
6484 	    else if (cin_isscopedecl(theline))	/* private:, ... */
6485 	    {
6486 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL;	/* class decl is this block */
6487 		amount += ind_scopedecl;
6488 	    }
6489 	    else
6490 	    {
6491 		if (ind_case_break && cin_isbreak(theline))	/* break; ... */
6492 		    lookfor_break = TRUE;
6493 
6494 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
6495 		amount += ind_level;	/* ind_level from start of block */
6496 	    }
6497 	    scope_amount = amount;
6498 	    whilelevel = 0;
6499 
6500 	    /*
6501 	     * Search backwards.  If we find something we recognize, line up
6502 	     * with that.
6503 	     *
6504 	     * if we're looking at an open brace, indent
6505 	     * the usual amount relative to the conditional
6506 	     * that opens the block.
6507 	     */
6508 	    curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
6509 	    for (;;)
6510 	    {
6511 		curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
6512 		curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
6513 
6514 		/*
6515 		 * If we went all the way back to the start of our scope, line
6516 		 * up with it.
6517 		 */
6518 		if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum <= ourscope)
6519 		{
6520 		    /* we reached end of scope:
6521 		     * if looking for a enum or structure initialization
6522 		     * go further back:
6523 		     * if it is an initializer (enum xxx or xxx =), then
6524 		     * don't add ind_continuation, otherwise it is a variable
6525 		     * declaration:
6526 		     * int x,
6527 		     *     here; <-- add ind_continuation
6528 		     */
6529 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6530 		    {
6531 			if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum == 0
6532 				|| curwin->w_cursor.lnum
6533 						    < ourscope - ind_maxparen)
6534 			{
6535 			    /* nothing found (abuse ind_maxparen as limit)
6536 			     * assume terminated line (i.e. a variable
6537 			     * initialization) */
6538 			    if (cont_amount > 0)
6539 				amount = cont_amount;
6540 			    else
6541 				amount += ind_continuation;
6542 			    break;
6543 			}
6544 
6545 			l = ml_get_curline();
6546 
6547 			/*
6548 			 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the
6549 			 * comment.
6550 			 */
6551 			trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment);
6552 			if (trypos != NULL)
6553 			{
6554 			    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6555 			    continue;
6556 			}
6557 
6558 			/*
6559 			 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
6560 			 */
6561 			if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
6562 			    continue;
6563 
6564 			if (cin_nocode(l))
6565 			    continue;
6566 
6567 			terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);
6568 
6569 			/*
6570 			 * If we are at top level and the line looks like a
6571 			 * function declaration, we are done
6572 			 * (it's a variable declaration).
6573 			 */
6574 			if (start_brace != BRACE_IN_COL0
6575 				|| !cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
6576 			{
6577 			    /* if the line is terminated with another ','
6578 			     * it is a continued variable initialization.
6579 			     * don't add extra indent.
6580 			     * TODO: does not work, if  a function
6581 			     * declaration is split over multiple lines:
6582 			     * cin_isfuncdecl returns FALSE then.
6583 			     */
6584 			    if (terminated == ',')
6585 				break;
6586 
6587 			    /* if it es a enum declaration or an assignment,
6588 			     * we are done.
6589 			     */
6590 			    if (terminated != ';' && cin_isinit())
6591 				break;
6592 
6593 			    /* nothing useful found */
6594 			    if (terminated == 0 || terminated == '{')
6595 				continue;
6596 			}
6597 
6598 			if (terminated != ';')
6599 			{
6600 			    /* Skip parens and braces. Position the cursor
6601 			     * over the rightmost paren, so that matching it
6602 			     * will take us back to the start of the line.
6603 			     */					/* XXX */
6604 			    trypos = NULL;
6605 			    if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')'))
6606 				trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6607 					ind_maxcomment);
6608 
6609 			    if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
6610 				trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);
6611 
6612 			    if (trypos != NULL)
6613 			    {
6614 				curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6615 				continue;
6616 			    }
6617 			}
6618 
6619 			/* it's a variable declaration, add indentation
6620 			 * like in
6621 			 * int a,
6622 			 *    b;
6623 			 */
6624 			if (cont_amount > 0)
6625 			    amount = cont_amount;
6626 			else
6627 			    amount += ind_continuation;
6628 		    }
6629 		    else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6630 		    {
6631 			if (cont_amount > 0)
6632 			    amount = cont_amount;
6633 			else
6634 			    amount += ind_continuation;
6635 		    }
6636 		    else if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
6637 					  && lookfor != LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6638 		    {
6639 			amount = scope_amount;
6640 			if (theline[0] == '{')
6641 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
6642 		    }
6643 		    break;
6644 		}
6645 
6646 		/*
6647 		 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
6648 		 */					    /* XXX */
6649 		if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6650 		{
6651 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6652 		    continue;
6653 		}
6654 
6655 		l = ml_get_curline();
6656 
6657 		/*
6658 		 * If this is a switch() label, may line up relative to that.
6659 		 * if this is a C++ scope declaration, do the same.
6660 		 */
6661 		iscase = cin_iscase(l);
6662 		if (iscase || cin_isscopedecl(l))
6663 		{
6664 		    /* we are only looking for cpp base class
6665 		     * declaration/initialization any longer */
6666 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6667 			break;
6668 
6669 		    /* When looking for a "do" we are not interested in
6670 		     * labels. */
6671 		    if (whilelevel > 0)
6672 			continue;
6673 
6674 		    /*
6675 		     *	case xx:
6676 		     *	    c = 99 +	    <- this indent plus continuation
6677 		     *->	   here;
6678 		     */
6679 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6680 					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6681 		    {
6682 			if (cont_amount > 0)
6683 			    amount = cont_amount;
6684 			else
6685 			    amount += ind_continuation;
6686 			break;
6687 		    }
6688 
6689 		    /*
6690 		     *	case xx:	<- line up with this case
6691 		     *	    x = 333;
6692 		     *	case yy:
6693 		     */
6694 		    if (       (iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE)
6695 			    || (iscase && lookfor_break)
6696 			    || (!iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL))
6697 		    {
6698 			/*
6699 			 * Check that this case label is not for another
6700 			 * switch()
6701 			 */				    /* XXX */
6702 			if ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) ==
6703 					     NULL || trypos->lnum == ourscope)
6704 			{
6705 			    amount = get_indent();	/* XXX */
6706 			    break;
6707 			}
6708 			continue;
6709 		    }
6710 
6711 		    n = get_indent_nolabel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum);  /* XXX */
6712 
6713 		    /*
6714 		     *	 case xx: if (cond)	    <- line up with this if
6715 		     *		      y = y + 1;
6716 		     * ->	  s = 99;
6717 		     *
6718 		     *	 case xx:
6719 		     *	     if (cond)		<- line up with this line
6720 		     *		 y = y + 1;
6721 		     * ->    s = 99;
6722 		     */
6723 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
6724 		    {
6725 			if (n)
6726 			    amount = n;
6727 
6728 			if (!lookfor_break)
6729 			    break;
6730 		    }
6731 
6732 		    /*
6733 		     *	 case xx: x = x + 1;	    <- line up with this x
6734 		     * ->	  y = y + 1;
6735 		     *
6736 		     *	 case xx: if (cond)	    <- line up with this if
6737 		     * ->	       y = y + 1;
6738 		     */
6739 		    if (n)
6740 		    {
6741 			amount = n;
6742 			l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
6743 			if (l != NULL && cin_is_cinword(l))
6744 			    amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
6745 			break;
6746 		    }
6747 
6748 		    /*
6749 		     * Try to get the indent of a statement before the switch
6750 		     * label.  If nothing is found, line up relative to the
6751 		     * switch label.
6752 		     *	    break;		<- may line up with this line
6753 		     *	 case xx:
6754 		     * ->   y = 1;
6755 		     */
6756 		    scope_amount = get_indent() + (iscase    /* XXX */
6757 					? ind_case_code : ind_scopedecl_code);
6758 		    lookfor = ind_case_break ? LOOKFOR_NOBREAK : LOOKFOR_ANY;
6759 		    continue;
6760 		}
6761 
6762 		/*
6763 		 * Looking for a switch() label or C++ scope declaration,
6764 		 * ignore other lines, skip {}-blocks.
6765 		 */
6766 		if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE || lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL)
6767 		{
6768 		    if (find_last_paren(l, '{', '}') && (trypos =
6769 				    find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6770 			curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6771 		    continue;
6772 		}
6773 
6774 		/*
6775 		 * Ignore jump labels with nothing after them.
6776 		 */
6777 		if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
6778 		{
6779 		    l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
6780 		    if (l == NULL || cin_nocode(l))
6781 			continue;
6782 		}
6783 
6784 		/*
6785 		 * Ignore #defines, #if, etc.
6786 		 * Ignore comment and empty lines.
6787 		 * (need to get the line again, cin_islabel() may have
6788 		 * unlocked it)
6789 		 */
6790 		l = ml_get_curline();
6791 		if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum)
6792 							     || cin_nocode(l))
6793 		    continue;
6794 
6795 		/*
6796 		 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or
6797 		 * constructor initialization?
6798 		 */						    /* XXX */
6799 		if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM && ind_cpp_baseclass
6800 					     && cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col))
6801 		{
6802 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6803 		    {
6804 			if (cont_amount > 0)
6805 			    amount = cont_amount;
6806 			else
6807 			    amount += ind_continuation;
6808 		    }
6809 		    else if (col == 0 || theline[0] == '{')
6810 		    {
6811 			amount = get_indent();
6812 			if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
6813 				&& (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6814 					ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6815 			    amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum); /* XXX */
6816 			if (theline[0] != '{')
6817 			    amount += ind_cpp_baseclass;
6818 		    }
6819 		    else
6820 		    {
6821 			curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
6822 			getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &col, NULL, NULL);
6823 			amount = (int)col;
6824 		    }
6825 		    break;
6826 		}
6827 		else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6828 		{
6829 		    /* only look, whether there is a cpp base class
6830 		     * declaration or initialization before the opening brace. */
6831 		    if (cin_isterminated(l, TRUE, FALSE))
6832 			break;
6833 		    else
6834 			continue;
6835 		}
6836 
6837 		/*
6838 		 * What happens next depends on the line being terminated.
6839 		 * If terminated with a ',' only consider it terminating if
6840 		 * there is anoter unterminated statement behind, eg:
6841 		 *   123,
6842 		 *   sizeof
6843 		 *	  here
6844 		 * Otherwise check whether it is a enumeration or structure
6845 		 * initialisation (not indented) or a variable declaration
6846 		 * (indented).
6847 		 */
6848 		terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);
6849 
6850 		if (terminated == 0 || (lookfor != LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6851 							&& terminated == ','))
6852 		{
6853 		    /*
6854 		     * if we're in the middle of a paren thing,
6855 		     * go back to the line that starts it so
6856 		     * we can get the right prevailing indent
6857 		     *	   if ( foo &&
6858 		     *		    bar )
6859 		     */
6860 		    /*
6861 		     * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
6862 		     * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
6863 		     */
6864 		    (void)find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
6865 		    trypos = find_match_paren(
6866 				 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
6867 							      ind_maxcomment);
6868 
6869 		    /*
6870 		     * If we are looking for ',', we also look for matching
6871 		     * braces.
6872 		     */
6873 		    if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
6874 			trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);
6875 
6876 		    if (trypos != NULL)
6877 		    {
6878 			/*
6879 			 * Check if we are on a case label now.  This is
6880 			 * handled above.
6881 			 *     case xx:  if ( asdf &&
6882 			 *			asdf)
6883 			 */
6884 			curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
6885 			l = ml_get_curline();
6886 			if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
6887 			{
6888 			    ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6889 			    continue;
6890 			}
6891 		    }
6892 
6893 		    /*
6894 		     * Skip over continuation lines to find the one to get the
6895 		     * indent from
6896 		     * char *usethis = "bla\
6897 		     *		 bla",
6898 		     *      here;
6899 		     */
6900 		    if (terminated == ',')
6901 		    {
6902 			while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
6903 			{
6904 			    l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6905 			    if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
6906 				break;
6907 			    --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6908 			}
6909 		    }
6910 
6911 		    /*
6912 		     * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
6913 		     * ignoring any jump label.	    XXX
6914 		     */
6915 		    cur_amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
6916 							  &l, ind_maxcomment);
6917 
6918 		    /*
6919 		     * If this is just above the line we are indenting, and it
6920 		     * starts with a '{', line it up with this line.
6921 		     *		while (not)
6922 		     * ->	{
6923 		     *		}
6924 		     */
6925 		    if (terminated != ',' && lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
6926 							 && theline[0] == '{')
6927 		    {
6928 			amount = cur_amount;
6929 			/*
6930 			 * Only add ind_open_extra when the current line
6931 			 * doesn't start with a '{', which must have a match
6932 			 * in the same line (scope is the same).  Probably:
6933 			 *	{ 1, 2 },
6934 			 * ->	{ 3, 4 }
6935 			 */
6936 			if (*skipwhite(l) != '{')
6937 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
6938 
6939 			if (ind_cpp_baseclass)
6940 			{
6941 			    /* have to look back, whether it is a cpp base
6942 			     * class declaration or initialization */
6943 			    lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
6944 			    continue;
6945 			}
6946 			break;
6947 		    }
6948 
6949 		    /*
6950 		     * Check if we are after an "if", "while", etc.
6951 		     * Also allow "   } else".
6952 		     */
6953 		    if (cin_is_cinword(l) || cin_iselse(skipwhite(l)))
6954 		    {
6955 			/*
6956 			 * Found an unterminated line after an if (), line up
6957 			 * with the last one.
6958 			 *   if (cond)
6959 			 *	    100 +
6960 			 * ->		here;
6961 			 */
6962 			if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6963 					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6964 			{
6965 			    if (cont_amount > 0)
6966 				amount = cont_amount;
6967 			    else
6968 				amount += ind_continuation;
6969 			    break;
6970 			}
6971 
6972 			/*
6973 			 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, we
6974 			 * are finished.
6975 			 *	    while (not)
6976 			 * ->		here;
6977 			 * Otherwise this indent can be used when the line
6978 			 * before this is terminated.
6979 			 *	yyy;
6980 			 *	if (stat)
6981 			 *	    while (not)
6982 			 *		xxx;
6983 			 * ->	here;
6984 			 */
6985 			amount = cur_amount;
6986 			if (theline[0] == '{')
6987 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
6988 			if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
6989 			{
6990 			    amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
6991 			    break;
6992 			}
6993 
6994 			/*
6995 			 * Special trick: when expecting the while () after a
6996 			 * do, line up with the while()
6997 			 *     do
6998 			 *	    x = 1;
6999 			 * ->  here
7000 			 */
7001 			l = skipwhite(ml_get_curline());
7002 			if (cin_isdo(l))
7003 			{
7004 			    if (whilelevel == 0)
7005 				break;
7006 			    --whilelevel;
7007 			}
7008 
7009 			/*
7010 			 * When searching for a terminated line, don't use the
7011 			 * one between the "if" and the "else".
7012 			 * Need to use the scope of this "else".  XXX
7013 			 * If whilelevel != 0 continue looking for a "do {".
7014 			 */
7015 			if (cin_iselse(l)
7016 				&& whilelevel == 0
7017 				&& ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
7018 								    == NULL
7019 				    || find_match(LOOKFOR_IF, trypos->lnum,
7020 					ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) == FAIL))
7021 			    break;
7022 		    }
7023 
7024 		    /*
7025 		     * If we're below an unterminated line that is not an
7026 		     * "if" or something, we may line up with this line or
7027 		     * add someting for a continuation line, depending on
7028 		     * the line before this one.
7029 		     */
7030 		    else
7031 		    {
7032 			/*
7033 			 * Found two unterminated lines on a row, line up with
7034 			 * the last one.
7035 			 *   c = 99 +
7036 			 *	    100 +
7037 			 * ->	    here;
7038 			 */
7039 			if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
7040 			{
7041 			    /* When line ends in a comma add extra indent */
7042 			    if (terminated == ',')
7043 				amount += ind_continuation;
7044 			    break;
7045 			}
7046 
7047 			if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7048 			{
7049 			    /* Found two lines ending in ',', lineup with the
7050 			     * lowest one, but check for cpp base class
7051 			     * declaration/initialization, if it is an
7052 			     * opening brace or we are looking just for
7053 			     * enumerations/initializations. */
7054 			    if (terminated == ',')
7055 			    {
7056 				if (ind_cpp_baseclass == 0)
7057 				    break;
7058 
7059 				lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
7060 				continue;
7061 			    }
7062 
7063 			    /* Ignore unterminated lines in between, but
7064 			     * reduce indent. */
7065 			    if (amount > cur_amount)
7066 				amount = cur_amount;
7067 			}
7068 			else
7069 			{
7070 			    /*
7071 			     * Found first unterminated line on a row, may
7072 			     * line up with this line, remember its indent
7073 			     *	    100 +
7074 			     * ->	    here;
7075 			     */
7076 			    amount = cur_amount;
7077 
7078 			    /*
7079 			     * If previous line ends in ',', check whether we
7080 			     * are in an initialization or enum
7081 			     * struct xxx =
7082 			     * {
7083 			     *      sizeof a,
7084 			     *      124 };
7085 			     * or a normal possible continuation line.
7086 			     * but only, of no other statement has been found
7087 			     * yet.
7088 			     */
7089 			    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL && terminated == ',')
7090 			    {
7091 				lookfor = LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT;
7092 				cont_amount = cin_first_id_amount();
7093 			    }
7094 			    else
7095 			    {
7096 				if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL
7097 					&& *l != NUL
7098 					&& l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
7099 								/* XXX */
7100 				    cont_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(
7101 						       curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
7102 				if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
7103 				    lookfor = LOOKFOR_UNTERM;
7104 			    }
7105 			}
7106 		    }
7107 		}
7108 
7109 		/*
7110 		 * Check if we are after a while (cond);
7111 		 * If so: Ignore until the matching "do".
7112 		 */
7113 							/* XXX */
7114 		else if (cin_iswhileofdo(l,
7115 					 curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7116 		{
7117 		    /*
7118 		     * Found an unterminated line after a while ();, line up
7119 		     * with the last one.
7120 		     *	    while (cond);
7121 		     *	    100 +		<- line up with this one
7122 		     * ->	    here;
7123 		     */
7124 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7125 					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7126 		    {
7127 			if (cont_amount > 0)
7128 			    amount = cont_amount;
7129 			else
7130 			    amount += ind_continuation;
7131 			break;
7132 		    }
7133 
7134 		    if (whilelevel == 0)
7135 		    {
7136 			lookfor = LOOKFOR_TERM;
7137 			amount = get_indent();	    /* XXX */
7138 			if (theline[0] == '{')
7139 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
7140 		    }
7141 		    ++whilelevel;
7142 		}
7143 
7144 		/*
7145 		 * We are after a "normal" statement.
7146 		 * If we had another statement we can stop now and use the
7147 		 * indent of that other statement.
7148 		 * Otherwise the indent of the current statement may be used,
7149 		 * search backwards for the next "normal" statement.
7150 		 */
7151 		else
7152 		{
7153 		    /*
7154 		     * Skip single break line, if before a switch label. It
7155 		     * may be lined up with the case label.
7156 		     */
7157 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_NOBREAK
7158 				  && cin_isbreak(skipwhite(ml_get_curline())))
7159 		    {
7160 			lookfor = LOOKFOR_ANY;
7161 			continue;
7162 		    }
7163 
7164 		    /*
7165 		     * Handle "do {" line.
7166 		     */
7167 		    if (whilelevel > 0)
7168 		    {
7169 			l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7170 			if (cin_isdo(l))
7171 			{
7172 			    amount = get_indent();	/* XXX */
7173 			    --whilelevel;
7174 			    continue;
7175 			}
7176 		    }
7177 
7178 		    /*
7179 		     * Found a terminated line above an unterminated line. Add
7180 		     * the amount for a continuation line.
7181 		     *	 x = 1;
7182 		     *	 y = foo +
7183 		     * ->	here;
7184 		     * or
7185 		     *	 int x = 1;
7186 		     *	 int foo,
7187 		     * ->	here;
7188 		     */
7189 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7190 					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7191 		    {
7192 			if (cont_amount > 0)
7193 			    amount = cont_amount;
7194 			else
7195 			    amount += ind_continuation;
7196 			break;
7197 		    }
7198 
7199 		    /*
7200 		     * Found a terminated line above a terminated line or "if"
7201 		     * etc. line. Use the amount of the line below us.
7202 		     *	 x = 1;				x = 1;
7203 		     *	 if (asdf)		    y = 2;
7204 		     *	     while (asdf)	  ->here;
7205 		     *		here;
7206 		     * ->foo;
7207 		     */
7208 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
7209 		    {
7210 			if (!lookfor_break && whilelevel == 0)
7211 			    break;
7212 		    }
7213 
7214 		    /*
7215 		     * First line above the one we're indenting is terminated.
7216 		     * To know what needs to be done look further backward for
7217 		     * a terminated line.
7218 		     */
7219 		    else
7220 		    {
7221 			/*
7222 			 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so
7223 			 * that matching it will take us back to the start of
7224 			 * the line.  Helps for:
7225 			 *     func(asdr,
7226 			 *	      asdfasdf);
7227 			 *     here;
7228 			 */
7229 term_again:
7230 			l = ml_get_curline();
7231 			if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7232 				&& (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7233 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7234 			{
7235 			    /*
7236 			     * Check if we are on a case label now.  This is
7237 			     * handled above.
7238 			     *	   case xx:  if ( asdf &&
7239 			     *			    asdf)
7240 			     */
7241 			    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7242 			    l = ml_get_curline();
7243 			    if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
7244 			    {
7245 				++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7246 				continue;
7247 			    }
7248 			}
7249 
7250 			/* When aligning with the case statement, don't align
7251 			 * with a statement after it.
7252 			 *  case 1: {   <-- don't use this { position
7253 			 *	stat;
7254 			 *  }
7255 			 *  case 2:
7256 			 *	stat;
7257 			 * }
7258 			 */
7259 			iscase = (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(l));
7260 
7261 			/*
7262 			 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
7263 			 * ignoring any jump label.
7264 			 */
7265 			amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
7266 							  &l, ind_maxcomment);
7267 
7268 			if (theline[0] == '{')
7269 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
7270 			/* See remark above: "Only add ind_open_extra.." */
7271 			if (*skipwhite(l) == '{')
7272 			    amount -= ind_open_extra;
7273 			lookfor = iscase ? LOOKFOR_ANY : LOOKFOR_TERM;
7274 
7275 			/*
7276 			 * If we're at the end of a block, skip to the start of
7277 			 * that block.
7278 			 */
7279 			curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7280 			if (*cin_skipcomment(l) == '}'
7281 				&& (trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
7282 							    != NULL) /* XXX */
7283 			{
7284 			    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7285 			    /* if not "else {" check for terminated again */
7286 			    /* but skip block for "} else {" */
7287 			    l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7288 			    if (*l == '}' || !cin_iselse(l))
7289 				goto term_again;
7290 			    ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7291 			}
7292 		    }
7293 		}
7294 	    }
7295 	}
7296       }
7297 
7298       /* add extra indent for a comment */
7299       if (cin_iscomment(theline))
7300 	  amount += ind_comment;
7301     }
7302 
7303     /*
7304      * ok -- we're not inside any sort of structure at all!
7305      *
7306      * this means we're at the top level, and everything should
7307      * basically just match where the previous line is, except
7308      * for the lines immediately following a function declaration,
7309      * which are K&R-style parameters and need to be indented.
7310      */
7311     else
7312     {
7313 	/*
7314 	 * if our line starts with an open brace, forget about any
7315 	 * prevailing indent and make sure it looks like the start
7316 	 * of a function
7317 	 */
7318 
7319 	if (theline[0] == '{')
7320 	{
7321 	    amount = ind_first_open;
7322 	}
7323 
7324 	/*
7325 	 * If the NEXT line is a function declaration, the current
7326 	 * line needs to be indented as a function type spec.
7327 	 * Don't do this if the current line looks like a comment
7328 	 * or if the current line is terminated, ie. ends in ';'.
7329 	 */
7330 	else if (cur_curpos.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count
7331 		&& !cin_nocode(theline)
7332 		&& !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)":", NULL)
7333 		&& !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7334 		&& cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum + 1)
7335 		&& !cin_isterminated(theline, FALSE, TRUE))
7336 	{
7337 	    amount = ind_func_type;
7338 	}
7339 	else
7340 	{
7341 	    amount = 0;
7342 	    curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
7343 
7344 	    /* search backwards until we find something we recognize */
7345 
7346 	    while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7347 	    {
7348 		curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
7349 		curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7350 
7351 		l = ml_get_curline();
7352 
7353 		/*
7354 		 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
7355 		 */						/* XXX */
7356 		if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7357 		{
7358 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
7359 		    continue;
7360 		}
7361 
7362 		/*
7363 		 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or constructor
7364 		 * initialization?
7365 		 */						    /* XXX */
7366 		if (ind_cpp_baseclass != 0 && theline[0] != '{'
7367 					     && cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col))
7368 		{
7369 		    if (col == 0)
7370 		    {
7371 			amount = get_indent() + ind_cpp_baseclass;  /* XXX */
7372 			if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7373 				&& (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7374 					ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7375 			    amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum)
7376 					   + ind_cpp_baseclass;	    /* XXX */
7377 		    }
7378 		    else
7379 		    {
7380 			curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
7381 			getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &col, NULL, NULL);
7382 			amount = (int)col;
7383 		    }
7384 		    break;
7385 		}
7386 
7387 		/*
7388 		 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
7389 		 */
7390 		if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7391 		    continue;
7392 
7393 		if (cin_nocode(l))
7394 		    continue;
7395 
7396 		/*
7397 		 * If the previous line ends in ',', use one level of
7398 		 * indentation:
7399 		 * int foo,
7400 		 *     bar;
7401 		 * do this before checking for '}' in case of eg.
7402 		 * enum foobar
7403 		 * {
7404 		 *   ...
7405 		 * } foo,
7406 		 *   bar;
7407 		 */
7408 		n = 0;
7409 		if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7410 			     || (*l != NUL && (n = l[STRLEN(l) - 1]) == '\\'))
7411 		{
7412 		    /* take us back to opening paren */
7413 		    if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7414 			    && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7415 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7416 			curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7417 
7418 		    /* For a line ending in ',' that is a continuation line go
7419 		     * back to the first line with a backslash:
7420 		     * char *foo = "bla\
7421 		     *		 bla",
7422 		     *      here;
7423 		     */
7424 		    while (n == 0 && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7425 		    {
7426 			l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7427 			if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
7428 			    break;
7429 			--curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7430 		    }
7431 
7432 		    amount = get_indent();	    /* XXX */
7433 
7434 		    if (amount == 0)
7435 			amount = cin_first_id_amount();
7436 		    if (amount == 0)
7437 			amount = ind_continuation;
7438 		    break;
7439 		}
7440 
7441 		/*
7442 		 * If the line looks like a function declaration, and we're
7443 		 * not in a comment, put it the left margin.
7444 		 */
7445 		if (cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum))  /* XXX */
7446 		    break;
7447 		l = ml_get_curline();
7448 
7449 		/*
7450 		 * Finding the closing '}' of a previous function.  Put
7451 		 * current line at the left margin.  For when 'cino' has "fs".
7452 		 */
7453 		if (*skipwhite(l) == '}')
7454 		    break;
7455 
7456 		/*			    (matching {)
7457 		 * If the previous line ends on '};' (maybe followed by
7458 		 * comments) align at column 0.  For example:
7459 		 * char *string_array[] = { "foo",
7460 		 *     / * x * / "b};ar" }; / * foobar * /
7461 		 */
7462 		if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"};", NULL))
7463 		    break;
7464 
7465 		/*
7466 		 * If the PREVIOUS line is a function declaration, the current
7467 		 * line (and the ones that follow) needs to be indented as
7468 		 * parameters.
7469 		 */
7470 		if (cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7471 		{
7472 		    amount = ind_param;
7473 		    break;
7474 		}
7475 
7476 		/*
7477 		 * If the previous line ends in ';' and the line before the
7478 		 * previous line ends in ',' or '\', ident to column zero:
7479 		 * int foo,
7480 		 *     bar;
7481 		 * indent_to_0 here;
7482 		 */
7483 		if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u*)";", NULL))
7484 		{
7485 		    l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7486 		    if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7487 			    || (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\'))
7488 			break;
7489 		    l = ml_get_curline();
7490 		}
7491 
7492 		/*
7493 		 * Doesn't look like anything interesting -- so just
7494 		 * use the indent of this line.
7495 		 *
7496 		 * Position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
7497 		 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
7498 		 */
7499 		find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
7500 
7501 		if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7502 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7503 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7504 		amount = get_indent();	    /* XXX */
7505 		break;
7506 	    }
7507 
7508 	    /* add extra indent for a comment */
7509 	    if (cin_iscomment(theline))
7510 		amount += ind_comment;
7511 
7512 	    /* add extra indent if the previous line ended in a backslash:
7513 	     *	      "asdfasdf\
7514 	     *		  here";
7515 	     *	    char *foo = "asdf\
7516 	     *			 here";
7517 	     */
7518 	    if (cur_curpos.lnum > 1)
7519 	    {
7520 		l = ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
7521 		if (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
7522 		{
7523 		    cur_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
7524 		    if (cur_amount > 0)
7525 			amount = cur_amount;
7526 		    else if (cur_amount == 0)
7527 			amount += ind_continuation;
7528 		}
7529 	    }
7530 	}
7531     }
7532 
7533 theend:
7534     /* put the cursor back where it belongs */
7535     curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
7536 
7537     vim_free(linecopy);
7538 
7539     if (amount < 0)
7540 	return 0;
7541     return amount;
7542 }
7543 
7544     static int
7545 find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)
7546     int		lookfor;
7547     linenr_T	ourscope;
7548     int		ind_maxparen;
7549     int		ind_maxcomment;
7550 {
7551     char_u	*look;
7552     pos_T	*theirscope;
7553     char_u	*mightbeif;
7554     int		elselevel;
7555     int		whilelevel;
7556 
7557     if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
7558     {
7559 	elselevel = 1;
7560 	whilelevel = 0;
7561     }
7562     else
7563     {
7564 	elselevel = 0;
7565 	whilelevel = 1;
7566     }
7567 
7568     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7569 
7570     while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > ourscope + 1)
7571     {
7572 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
7573 	curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7574 
7575 	look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7576 	if (cin_iselse(look)
7577 		|| cin_isif(look)
7578 		|| cin_isdo(look)			    /* XXX */
7579 		|| cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7580 	{
7581 	    /*
7582 	     * if we've gone outside the braces entirely,
7583 	     * we must be out of scope...
7584 	     */
7585 	    theirscope = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);  /* XXX */
7586 	    if (theirscope == NULL)
7587 		break;
7588 
7589 	    /*
7590 	     * and if the brace enclosing this is further
7591 	     * back than the one enclosing the else, we're
7592 	     * out of luck too.
7593 	     */
7594 	    if (theirscope->lnum < ourscope)
7595 		break;
7596 
7597 	    /*
7598 	     * and if they're enclosed in a *deeper* brace,
7599 	     * then we can ignore it because it's in a
7600 	     * different scope...
7601 	     */
7602 	    if (theirscope->lnum > ourscope)
7603 		continue;
7604 
7605 	    /*
7606 	     * if it was an "else" (that's not an "else if")
7607 	     * then we need to go back to another if, so
7608 	     * increment elselevel
7609 	     */
7610 	    look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7611 	    if (cin_iselse(look))
7612 	    {
7613 		mightbeif = cin_skipcomment(look + 4);
7614 		if (!cin_isif(mightbeif))
7615 		    ++elselevel;
7616 		continue;
7617 	    }
7618 
7619 	    /*
7620 	     * if it was a "while" then we need to go back to
7621 	     * another "do", so increment whilelevel.  XXX
7622 	     */
7623 	    if (cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7624 	    {
7625 		++whilelevel;
7626 		continue;
7627 	    }
7628 
7629 	    /* If it's an "if" decrement elselevel */
7630 	    look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7631 	    if (cin_isif(look))
7632 	    {
7633 		elselevel--;
7634 		/*
7635 		 * When looking for an "if" ignore "while"s that
7636 		 * get in the way.
7637 		 */
7638 		if (elselevel == 0 && lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
7639 		    whilelevel = 0;
7640 	    }
7641 
7642 	    /* If it's a "do" decrement whilelevel */
7643 	    if (cin_isdo(look))
7644 		whilelevel--;
7645 
7646 	    /*
7647 	     * if we've used up all the elses, then
7648 	     * this must be the if that we want!
7649 	     * match the indent level of that if.
7650 	     */
7651 	    if (elselevel <= 0 && whilelevel <= 0)
7652 	    {
7653 		return OK;
7654 	    }
7655 	}
7656     }
7657     return FAIL;
7658 }
7659 
7660 # if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
7661 /*
7662  * Get indent level from 'indentexpr'.
7663  */
7664     int
7665 get_expr_indent()
7666 {
7667     int		indent;
7668     pos_T	pos;
7669     int		save_State;
7670     int		use_sandbox = was_set_insecurely((char_u *)"indentexpr",
7671 								   OPT_LOCAL);
7672 
7673     pos = curwin->w_cursor;
7674     set_vim_var_nr(VV_LNUM, curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
7675     if (use_sandbox)
7676 	++sandbox;
7677     ++textlock;
7678     indent = eval_to_number(curbuf->b_p_inde);
7679     if (use_sandbox)
7680 	--sandbox;
7681     --textlock;
7682 
7683     /* Restore the cursor position so that 'indentexpr' doesn't need to.
7684      * Pretend to be in Insert mode, allow cursor past end of line for "o"
7685      * command. */
7686     save_State = State;
7687     State = INSERT;
7688     curwin->w_cursor = pos;
7689     check_cursor();
7690     State = save_State;
7691 
7692     /* If there is an error, just keep the current indent. */
7693     if (indent < 0)
7694 	indent = get_indent();
7695 
7696     return indent;
7697 }
7698 # endif
7699 
7700 #endif /* FEAT_CINDENT */
7701 
7702 #if defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(PROTO)
7703 
7704 static int lisp_match __ARGS((char_u *p));
7705 
7706     static int
7707 lisp_match(p)
7708     char_u	*p;
7709 {
7710     char_u	buf[LSIZE];
7711     int		len;
7712     char_u	*word = p_lispwords;
7713 
7714     while (*word != NUL)
7715     {
7716 	(void)copy_option_part(&word, buf, LSIZE, ",");
7717 	len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
7718 	if (STRNCMP(buf, p, len) == 0 && p[len] == ' ')
7719 	    return TRUE;
7720     }
7721     return FALSE;
7722 }
7723 
7724 /*
7725  * When 'p' is present in 'cpoptions, a Vi compatible method is used.
7726  * The incompatible newer method is quite a bit better at indenting
7727  * code in lisp-like languages than the traditional one; it's still
7728  * mostly heuristics however -- Dirk van Deun, [email protected]
7729  *
7730  * TODO:
7731  * Findmatch() should be adapted for lisp, also to make showmatch
7732  * work correctly: now (v5.3) it seems all C/C++ oriented:
7733  * - it does not recognize the #\( and #\) notations as character literals
7734  * - it doesn't know about comments starting with a semicolon
7735  * - it incorrectly interprets '(' as a character literal
7736  * All this messes up get_lisp_indent in some rare cases.
7737  * Update from Sergey Khorev:
7738  * I tried to fix the first two issues.
7739  */
7740     int
7741 get_lisp_indent()
7742 {
7743     pos_T	*pos, realpos, paren;
7744     int		amount;
7745     char_u	*that;
7746     colnr_T	col;
7747     colnr_T	firsttry;
7748     int		parencount, quotecount;
7749     int		vi_lisp;
7750 
7751     /* Set vi_lisp to use the vi-compatible method */
7752     vi_lisp = (vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISP) != NULL);
7753 
7754     realpos = curwin->w_cursor;
7755     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7756 
7757     if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) == NULL)
7758 	pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
7759     else
7760     {
7761 	paren = *pos;
7762 	pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
7763 	if (pos == NULL || ltp(pos, &paren))
7764 	    pos = &paren;
7765     }
7766     if (pos != NULL)
7767     {
7768 	/* Extra trick: Take the indent of the first previous non-white
7769 	 * line that is at the same () level. */
7770 	amount = -1;
7771 	parencount = 0;
7772 
7773 	while (--curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= pos->lnum)
7774 	{
7775 	    if (linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7776 		continue;
7777 	    for (that = ml_get_curline(); *that != NUL; ++that)
7778 	    {
7779 		if (*that == ';')
7780 		{
7781 		    while (*(that + 1) != NUL)
7782 			++that;
7783 		    continue;
7784 		}
7785 		if (*that == '\\')
7786 		{
7787 		    if (*(that + 1) != NUL)
7788 			++that;
7789 		    continue;
7790 		}
7791 		if (*that == '"' && *(that + 1) != NUL)
7792 		{
7793 		    that++;
7794 		    while (*that && (*that != '"' || *(that - 1) == '\\'))
7795 			++that;
7796 		}
7797 		if (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7798 		    ++parencount;
7799 		else if (*that == ')' || *that == ']')
7800 		    --parencount;
7801 	    }
7802 	    if (parencount == 0)
7803 	    {
7804 		amount = get_indent();
7805 		break;
7806 	    }
7807 	}
7808 
7809 	if (amount == -1)
7810 	{
7811 	    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
7812 	    curwin->w_cursor.col = pos->col;
7813 	    col = pos->col;
7814 
7815 	    that = ml_get_curline();
7816 
7817 	    if (vi_lisp && get_indent() == 0)
7818 		amount = 2;
7819 	    else
7820 	    {
7821 		amount = 0;
7822 		while (*that && col)
7823 		{
7824 		    amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that, (colnr_T)amount);
7825 		    col--;
7826 		}
7827 
7828 		/*
7829 		 * Some keywords require "body" indenting rules (the
7830 		 * non-standard-lisp ones are Scheme special forms):
7831 		 *
7832 		 * (let ((a 1))    instead    (let ((a 1))
7833 		 *   (...))	      of	   (...))
7834 		 */
7835 
7836 		if (!vi_lisp && (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7837 						      && lisp_match(that + 1))
7838 		    amount += 2;
7839 		else
7840 		{
7841 		    that++;
7842 		    amount++;
7843 		    firsttry = amount;
7844 
7845 		    while (vim_iswhite(*that))
7846 		    {
7847 			amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
7848 			++that;
7849 		    }
7850 
7851 		    if (*that && *that != ';') /* not a comment line */
7852 		    {
7853 			/* test *that != '(' to accomodate first let/do
7854 			 * argument if it is more than one line */
7855 			if (!vi_lisp && *that != '(' && *that != '[')
7856 			    firsttry++;
7857 
7858 			parencount = 0;
7859 			quotecount = 0;
7860 
7861 			if (vi_lisp
7862 				|| (*that != '"'
7863 				    && *that != '\''
7864 				    && *that != '#'
7865 				    && (*that < '0' || *that > '9')))
7866 			{
7867 			    while (*that
7868 				    && (!vim_iswhite(*that)
7869 					|| quotecount
7870 					|| parencount)
7871 				    && (!((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7872 					    && !quotecount
7873 					    && !parencount
7874 					    && vi_lisp)))
7875 			    {
7876 				if (*that == '"')
7877 				    quotecount = !quotecount;
7878 				if ((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7879 							       && !quotecount)
7880 				    ++parencount;
7881 				if ((*that == ')' || *that == ']')
7882 							       && !quotecount)
7883 				    --parencount;
7884 				if (*that == '\\' && *(that+1) != NUL)
7885 				    amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
7886 							     (colnr_T)amount);
7887 				amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
7888 							     (colnr_T)amount);
7889 			    }
7890 			}
7891 			while (vim_iswhite(*that))
7892 			{
7893 			    amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
7894 			    that++;
7895 			}
7896 			if (!*that || *that == ';')
7897 			    amount = firsttry;
7898 		    }
7899 		}
7900 	    }
7901 	}
7902     }
7903     else
7904 	amount = 0;	/* no matching '(' or '[' found, use zero indent */
7905 
7906     curwin->w_cursor = realpos;
7907 
7908     return amount;
7909 }
7910 #endif /* FEAT_LISP */
7911 
7912     void
7913 prepare_to_exit()
7914 {
7915 #if defined(SIGHUP) && defined(SIG_IGN)
7916     /* Ignore SIGHUP, because a dropped connection causes a read error, which
7917      * makes Vim exit and then handling SIGHUP causes various reentrance
7918      * problems. */
7919     signal(SIGHUP, SIG_IGN);
7920 #endif
7921 
7922 #ifdef FEAT_GUI
7923     if (gui.in_use)
7924     {
7925 	gui.dying = TRUE;
7926 	out_trash();	/* trash any pending output */
7927     }
7928     else
7929 #endif
7930     {
7931 	windgoto((int)Rows - 1, 0);
7932 
7933 	/*
7934 	 * Switch terminal mode back now, so messages end up on the "normal"
7935 	 * screen (if there are two screens).
7936 	 */
7937 	settmode(TMODE_COOK);
7938 #ifdef WIN3264
7939 	if (can_end_termcap_mode(FALSE) == TRUE)
7940 #endif
7941 	    stoptermcap();
7942 	out_flush();
7943     }
7944 }
7945 
7946 /*
7947  * Preserve files and exit.
7948  * When called IObuff must contain a message.
7949  */
7950     void
7951 preserve_exit()
7952 {
7953     buf_T	*buf;
7954 
7955     prepare_to_exit();
7956 
7957     /* Setting this will prevent free() calls.  That avoids calling free()
7958      * recursively when free() was invoked with a bad pointer. */
7959     really_exiting = TRUE;
7960 
7961     out_str(IObuff);
7962     screen_start();		    /* don't know where cursor is now */
7963     out_flush();
7964 
7965     ml_close_notmod();		    /* close all not-modified buffers */
7966 
7967     for (buf = firstbuf; buf != NULL; buf = buf->b_next)
7968     {
7969 	if (buf->b_ml.ml_mfp != NULL && buf->b_ml.ml_mfp->mf_fname != NULL)
7970 	{
7971 	    OUT_STR(_("Vim: preserving files...\n"));
7972 	    screen_start();	    /* don't know where cursor is now */
7973 	    out_flush();
7974 	    ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE);	/* preserve all swap files */
7975 	    break;
7976 	}
7977     }
7978 
7979     ml_close_all(FALSE);	    /* close all memfiles, without deleting */
7980 
7981     OUT_STR(_("Vim: Finished.\n"));
7982 
7983     getout(1);
7984 }
7985 
7986 /*
7987  * return TRUE if "fname" exists.
7988  */
7989     int
7990 vim_fexists(fname)
7991     char_u  *fname;
7992 {
7993     struct stat st;
7994 
7995     if (mch_stat((char *)fname, &st))
7996 	return FALSE;
7997     return TRUE;
7998 }
7999 
8000 /*
8001  * Check for CTRL-C pressed, but only once in a while.
8002  * Should be used instead of ui_breakcheck() for functions that check for
8003  * each line in the file.  Calling ui_breakcheck() each time takes too much
8004  * time, because it can be a system call.
8005  */
8006 
8007 #ifndef BREAKCHECK_SKIP
8008 # ifdef FEAT_GUI		    /* assume the GUI only runs on fast computers */
8009 #  define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 200
8010 # else
8011 #  define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 32
8012 # endif
8013 #endif
8014 
8015 static int	breakcheck_count = 0;
8016 
8017     void
8018 line_breakcheck()
8019 {
8020     if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP)
8021     {
8022 	breakcheck_count = 0;
8023 	ui_breakcheck();
8024     }
8025 }
8026 
8027 /*
8028  * Like line_breakcheck() but check 10 times less often.
8029  */
8030     void
8031 fast_breakcheck()
8032 {
8033     if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP * 10)
8034     {
8035 	breakcheck_count = 0;
8036 	ui_breakcheck();
8037     }
8038 }
8039 
8040 /*
8041  * Expand wildcards.  Calls gen_expand_wildcards() and removes files matching
8042  * 'wildignore'.
8043  * Returns OK or FAIL.
8044  */
8045     int
8046 expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
8047     int		   num_pat;	/* number of input patterns */
8048     char_u	 **pat;		/* array of input patterns */
8049     int		  *num_file;	/* resulting number of files */
8050     char_u	***file;	/* array of resulting files */
8051     int		   flags;	/* EW_DIR, etc. */
8052 {
8053     int		retval;
8054     int		i, j;
8055     char_u	*p;
8056     int		non_suf_match;	/* number without matching suffix */
8057 
8058     retval = gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8059 
8060     /* When keeping all matches, return here */
8061     if (flags & EW_KEEPALL)
8062 	return retval;
8063 
8064 #ifdef FEAT_WILDIGN
8065     /*
8066      * Remove names that match 'wildignore'.
8067      */
8068     if (*p_wig)
8069     {
8070 	char_u	*ffname;
8071 
8072 	/* check all files in (*file)[] */
8073 	for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
8074 	{
8075 	    ffname = FullName_save((*file)[i], FALSE);
8076 	    if (ffname == NULL)		/* out of memory */
8077 		break;
8078 # ifdef VMS
8079 	    vms_remove_version(ffname);
8080 # endif
8081 	    if (match_file_list(p_wig, (*file)[i], ffname))
8082 	    {
8083 		/* remove this matching file from the list */
8084 		vim_free((*file)[i]);
8085 		for (j = i; j + 1 < *num_file; ++j)
8086 		    (*file)[j] = (*file)[j + 1];
8087 		--*num_file;
8088 		--i;
8089 	    }
8090 	    vim_free(ffname);
8091 	}
8092     }
8093 #endif
8094 
8095     /*
8096      * Move the names where 'suffixes' match to the end.
8097      */
8098     if (*num_file > 1)
8099     {
8100 	non_suf_match = 0;
8101 	for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
8102 	{
8103 	    if (!match_suffix((*file)[i]))
8104 	    {
8105 		/*
8106 		 * Move the name without matching suffix to the front
8107 		 * of the list.
8108 		 */
8109 		p = (*file)[i];
8110 		for (j = i; j > non_suf_match; --j)
8111 		    (*file)[j] = (*file)[j - 1];
8112 		(*file)[non_suf_match++] = p;
8113 	    }
8114 	}
8115     }
8116 
8117     return retval;
8118 }
8119 
8120 /*
8121  * Return TRUE if "fname" matches with an entry in 'suffixes'.
8122  */
8123     int
8124 match_suffix(fname)
8125     char_u	*fname;
8126 {
8127     int		fnamelen, setsuflen;
8128     char_u	*setsuf;
8129 #define MAXSUFLEN 30	    /* maximum length of a file suffix */
8130     char_u	suf_buf[MAXSUFLEN];
8131 
8132     fnamelen = (int)STRLEN(fname);
8133     setsuflen = 0;
8134     for (setsuf = p_su; *setsuf; )
8135     {
8136 	setsuflen = copy_option_part(&setsuf, suf_buf, MAXSUFLEN, ".,");
8137 	if (fnamelen >= setsuflen
8138 		&& fnamencmp(suf_buf, fname + fnamelen - setsuflen,
8139 					      (size_t)setsuflen) == 0)
8140 	    break;
8141 	setsuflen = 0;
8142     }
8143     return (setsuflen != 0);
8144 }
8145 
8146 #if !defined(NO_EXPANDPATH) || defined(PROTO)
8147 
8148 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8149 static int vim_backtick __ARGS((char_u *p));
8150 static int expand_backtick __ARGS((garray_T *gap, char_u *pat, int flags));
8151 # endif
8152 
8153 # if defined(MSDOS) || defined(FEAT_GUI_W16) || defined(WIN3264)
8154 /*
8155  * File name expansion code for MS-DOS, Win16 and Win32.  It's here because
8156  * it's shared between these systems.
8157  */
8158 # if defined(DJGPP) || defined(PROTO)
8159 #  define _cdecl	    /* DJGPP doesn't have this */
8160 # else
8161 #  ifdef __BORLANDC__
8162 #   define _cdecl _RTLENTRYF
8163 #  endif
8164 # endif
8165 
8166 /*
8167  * comparison function for qsort in dos_expandpath()
8168  */
8169     static int _cdecl
8170 pstrcmp(const void *a, const void *b)
8171 {
8172     return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b, -1));
8173 }
8174 
8175 # ifndef WIN3264
8176     static void
8177 namelowcpy(
8178     char_u *d,
8179     char_u *s)
8180 {
8181 #  ifdef DJGPP
8182     if (USE_LONG_FNAME)	    /* don't lower case on Windows 95/NT systems */
8183 	while (*s)
8184 	    *d++ = *s++;
8185     else
8186 #  endif
8187 	while (*s)
8188 	    *d++ = TOLOWER_LOC(*s++);
8189     *d = NUL;
8190 }
8191 # endif
8192 
8193 /*
8194  * Recursively expand one path component into all matching files and/or
8195  * directories.  Adds matches to "gap".  Handles "*", "?", "[a-z]", "**", etc.
8196  * Return the number of matches found.
8197  * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting
8198  * at "path[wildoff]".
8199  * Return the number of matches found.
8200  * NOTE: much of this is identical to unix_expandpath(), keep in sync!
8201  */
8202     static int
8203 dos_expandpath(
8204     garray_T	*gap,
8205     char_u	*path,
8206     int		wildoff,
8207     int		flags,		/* EW_* flags */
8208     int		didstar)	/* expaneded "**" once already */
8209 {
8210     char_u	*buf;
8211     char_u	*path_end;
8212     char_u	*p, *s, *e;
8213     int		start_len = gap->ga_len;
8214     char_u	*pat;
8215     regmatch_T	regmatch;
8216     int		starts_with_dot;
8217     int		matches;
8218     int		len;
8219     int		starstar = FALSE;
8220     static int	stardepth = 0;	    /* depth for "**" expansion */
8221 #ifdef WIN3264
8222     WIN32_FIND_DATA	fb;
8223     HANDLE		hFind = (HANDLE)0;
8224 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8225     WIN32_FIND_DATAW    wfb;
8226     WCHAR		*wn = NULL;	/* UCS-2 name, NULL when not used. */
8227 # endif
8228 #else
8229     struct ffblk	fb;
8230 #endif
8231     char_u		*matchname;
8232     int			ok;
8233 
8234     /* Expanding "**" may take a long time, check for CTRL-C. */
8235     if (stardepth > 0)
8236     {
8237 	ui_breakcheck();
8238 	if (got_int)
8239 	    return 0;
8240     }
8241 
8242     /* make room for file name */
8243     buf = alloc((int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5);
8244     if (buf == NULL)
8245 	return 0;
8246 
8247     /*
8248      * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard or a ~1.
8249      * Copy it into buf, including the preceding characters.
8250      */
8251     p = buf;
8252     s = buf;
8253     e = NULL;
8254     path_end = path;
8255     while (*path_end != NUL)
8256     {
8257 	/* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will
8258 	 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */
8259 	if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end))
8260 	    *p++ = *path_end++;
8261 	else if (*path_end == '\\' || *path_end == ':' || *path_end == '/')
8262 	{
8263 	    if (e != NULL)
8264 		break;
8265 	    s = p + 1;
8266 	}
8267 	else if (path_end >= path + wildoff
8268 			 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[~", *path_end) != NULL)
8269 	    e = p;
8270 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8271 	if (has_mbyte)
8272 	{
8273 	    len = (*mb_ptr2len)(path_end);
8274 	    STRNCPY(p, path_end, len);
8275 	    p += len;
8276 	    path_end += len;
8277 	}
8278 	else
8279 #endif
8280 	    *p++ = *path_end++;
8281     }
8282     e = p;
8283     *e = NUL;
8284 
8285     /* now we have one wildcard component between s and e */
8286     /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard
8287      * component. */
8288     for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p)
8289 	if (rem_backslash(p))
8290 	{
8291 	    STRCPY(p, p + 1);
8292 	    --e;
8293 	    --s;
8294 	}
8295 
8296     /* Check for "**" between "s" and "e". */
8297     for (p = s; p < e; ++p)
8298 	if (p[0] == '*' && p[1] == '*')
8299 	    starstar = TRUE;
8300 
8301     starts_with_dot = (*s == '.');
8302     pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE);
8303     if (pat == NULL)
8304     {
8305 	vim_free(buf);
8306 	return 0;
8307     }
8308 
8309     /* compile the regexp into a program */
8310     regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE;		/* Always ignore case */
8311     regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC);
8312     vim_free(pat);
8313 
8314     if (regmatch.regprog == NULL)
8315     {
8316 	vim_free(buf);
8317 	return 0;
8318     }
8319 
8320     /* remember the pattern or file name being looked for */
8321     matchname = vim_strsave(s);
8322 
8323     /* If "**" is by itself, this is the first time we encounter it and more
8324      * is following then find matches without any directory. */
8325     if (!didstar && stardepth < 100 && starstar && e - s == 2
8326 							  && *path_end == '/')
8327     {
8328 	STRCPY(s, path_end + 1);
8329 	++stardepth;
8330 	(void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, (int)(s - buf), flags, TRUE);
8331 	--stardepth;
8332     }
8333 
8334     /* Scan all files in the directory with "dir/ *.*" */
8335     STRCPY(s, "*.*");
8336 #ifdef WIN3264
8337 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8338     if (enc_codepage >= 0 && (int)GetACP() != enc_codepage)
8339     {
8340 	/* The active codepage differs from 'encoding'.  Attempt using the
8341 	 * wide function.  If it fails because it is not implemented fall back
8342 	 * to the non-wide version (for Windows 98) */
8343 	wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL);
8344 	if (wn != NULL)
8345 	{
8346 	    hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
8347 	    if (hFind == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE
8348 			      && GetLastError() == ERROR_CALL_NOT_IMPLEMENTED)
8349 	    {
8350 		vim_free(wn);
8351 		wn = NULL;
8352 	    }
8353 	}
8354     }
8355 
8356     if (wn == NULL)
8357 # endif
8358 	hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
8359     ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
8360 #else
8361     /* If we are expanding wildcards we try both files and directories */
8362     ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
8363 		(*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
8364 #endif
8365 
8366     while (ok)
8367     {
8368 #ifdef WIN3264
8369 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8370 	if (wn != NULL)
8371 	    p = ucs2_to_enc(wfb.cFileName, NULL);   /* p is allocated here */
8372 	else
8373 # endif
8374 	    p = (char_u *)fb.cFileName;
8375 #else
8376 	p = (char_u *)fb.ff_name;
8377 #endif
8378 	/* Ignore entries starting with a dot, unless when asked for.  Accept
8379 	 * all entries found with "matchname". */
8380 	if ((p[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot)
8381 		&& (matchname == NULL
8382 		    || vim_regexec(&regmatch, p, (colnr_T)0)))
8383 	{
8384 #ifdef WIN3264
8385 	    STRCPY(s, p);
8386 #else
8387 	    namelowcpy(s, p);
8388 #endif
8389 	    len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
8390 
8391 	    if (starstar && stardepth < 100)
8392 	    {
8393 		/* For "**" in the pattern first go deeper in the tree to
8394 		 * find matches. */
8395 		STRCPY(buf + len, "/**");
8396 		STRCPY(buf + len + 3, path_end);
8397 		++stardepth;
8398 		(void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, TRUE);
8399 		--stardepth;
8400 	    }
8401 
8402 	    STRCPY(buf + len, path_end);
8403 	    if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end))
8404 	    {
8405 		/* need to expand another component of the path */
8406 		/* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8407 		(void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, FALSE);
8408 	    }
8409 	    else
8410 	    {
8411 		/* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */
8412 		/* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8413 		if (*path_end != 0)
8414 		    backslash_halve(buf + len + 1);
8415 		if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0)	/* add existing file */
8416 		    addfile(gap, buf, flags);
8417 	    }
8418 	}
8419 
8420 #ifdef WIN3264
8421 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8422 	if (wn != NULL)
8423 	{
8424 	    vim_free(p);
8425 	    ok = FindNextFileW(hFind, &wfb);
8426 	}
8427 	else
8428 # endif
8429 	    ok = FindNextFile(hFind, &fb);
8430 #else
8431 	ok = (findnext(&fb) == 0);
8432 #endif
8433 
8434 	/* If no more matches and no match was used, try expanding the name
8435 	 * itself.  Finds the long name of a short filename. */
8436 	if (!ok && matchname != NULL && gap->ga_len == start_len)
8437 	{
8438 	    STRCPY(s, matchname);
8439 #ifdef WIN3264
8440 	    FindClose(hFind);
8441 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8442 	    if (wn != NULL)
8443 	    {
8444 		vim_free(wn);
8445 		wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL);
8446 		if (wn != NULL)
8447 		    hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
8448 	    }
8449 	    if (wn == NULL)
8450 # endif
8451 		hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
8452 	    ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
8453 #else
8454 	    ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
8455 		 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
8456 #endif
8457 	    vim_free(matchname);
8458 	    matchname = NULL;
8459 	}
8460     }
8461 
8462 #ifdef WIN3264
8463     FindClose(hFind);
8464 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8465     vim_free(wn);
8466 # endif
8467 #endif
8468     vim_free(buf);
8469     vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
8470     vim_free(matchname);
8471 
8472     matches = gap->ga_len - start_len;
8473     if (matches > 0)
8474 	qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, (size_t)matches,
8475 						   sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp);
8476     return matches;
8477 }
8478 
8479     int
8480 mch_expandpath(
8481     garray_T	*gap,
8482     char_u	*path,
8483     int		flags)		/* EW_* flags */
8484 {
8485     return dos_expandpath(gap, path, 0, flags, FALSE);
8486 }
8487 # endif /* MSDOS || FEAT_GUI_W16 || WIN3264 */
8488 
8489 #if (defined(UNIX) && !defined(VMS)) || defined(USE_UNIXFILENAME) \
8490 	|| defined(PROTO)
8491 /*
8492  * Unix style wildcard expansion code.
8493  * It's here because it's used both for Unix and Mac.
8494  */
8495 static int	pstrcmp __ARGS((const void *, const void *));
8496 
8497     static int
8498 pstrcmp(a, b)
8499     const void *a, *b;
8500 {
8501     return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b, -1));
8502 }
8503 
8504 /*
8505  * Recursively expand one path component into all matching files and/or
8506  * directories.  Adds matches to "gap".  Handles "*", "?", "[a-z]", "**", etc.
8507  * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting
8508  * at "path + wildoff".
8509  * Return the number of matches found.
8510  * NOTE: much of this is identical to dos_expandpath(), keep in sync!
8511  */
8512     int
8513 unix_expandpath(gap, path, wildoff, flags, didstar)
8514     garray_T	*gap;
8515     char_u	*path;
8516     int		wildoff;
8517     int		flags;		/* EW_* flags */
8518     int		didstar;	/* expanded "**" once already */
8519 {
8520     char_u	*buf;
8521     char_u	*path_end;
8522     char_u	*p, *s, *e;
8523     int		start_len = gap->ga_len;
8524     char_u	*pat;
8525     regmatch_T	regmatch;
8526     int		starts_with_dot;
8527     int		matches;
8528     int		len;
8529     int		starstar = FALSE;
8530     static int	stardepth = 0;	    /* depth for "**" expansion */
8531 
8532     DIR		*dirp;
8533     struct dirent *dp;
8534 
8535     /* Expanding "**" may take a long time, check for CTRL-C. */
8536     if (stardepth > 0)
8537     {
8538 	ui_breakcheck();
8539 	if (got_int)
8540 	    return 0;
8541     }
8542 
8543     /* make room for file name */
8544     buf = alloc((int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5);
8545     if (buf == NULL)
8546 	return 0;
8547 
8548     /*
8549      * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard.
8550      * Copy it into "buf", including the preceding characters.
8551      */
8552     p = buf;
8553     s = buf;
8554     e = NULL;
8555     path_end = path;
8556     while (*path_end != NUL)
8557     {
8558 	/* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will
8559 	 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */
8560 	if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end))
8561 	    *p++ = *path_end++;
8562 	else if (*path_end == '/')
8563 	{
8564 	    if (e != NULL)
8565 		break;
8566 	    s = p + 1;
8567 	}
8568 	else if (path_end >= path + wildoff
8569 			 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[{~$", *path_end) != NULL)
8570 	    e = p;
8571 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8572 	if (has_mbyte)
8573 	{
8574 	    len = (*mb_ptr2len)(path_end);
8575 	    STRNCPY(p, path_end, len);
8576 	    p += len;
8577 	    path_end += len;
8578 	}
8579 	else
8580 #endif
8581 	    *p++ = *path_end++;
8582     }
8583     e = p;
8584     *e = NUL;
8585 
8586     /* now we have one wildcard component between "s" and "e" */
8587     /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard
8588      * component. */
8589     for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p)
8590 	if (rem_backslash(p))
8591 	{
8592 	    STRCPY(p, p + 1);
8593 	    --e;
8594 	    --s;
8595 	}
8596 
8597     /* Check for "**" between "s" and "e". */
8598     for (p = s; p < e; ++p)
8599 	if (p[0] == '*' && p[1] == '*')
8600 	    starstar = TRUE;
8601 
8602     /* convert the file pattern to a regexp pattern */
8603     starts_with_dot = (*s == '.');
8604     pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE);
8605     if (pat == NULL)
8606     {
8607 	vim_free(buf);
8608 	return 0;
8609     }
8610 
8611     /* compile the regexp into a program */
8612 #ifdef CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME
8613     regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE;		/* Behave like Terminal.app */
8614 #else
8615     regmatch.rm_ic = FALSE;		/* Don't ever ignore case */
8616 #endif
8617     regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC);
8618     vim_free(pat);
8619 
8620     if (regmatch.regprog == NULL)
8621     {
8622 	vim_free(buf);
8623 	return 0;
8624     }
8625 
8626     /* If "**" is by itself, this is the first time we encounter it and more
8627      * is following then find matches without any directory. */
8628     if (!didstar && stardepth < 100 && starstar && e - s == 2
8629 							  && *path_end == '/')
8630     {
8631 	STRCPY(s, path_end + 1);
8632 	++stardepth;
8633 	(void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, (int)(s - buf), flags, TRUE);
8634 	--stardepth;
8635     }
8636 
8637     /* open the directory for scanning */
8638     *s = NUL;
8639     dirp = opendir(*buf == NUL ? "." : (char *)buf);
8640 
8641     /* Find all matching entries */
8642     if (dirp != NULL)
8643     {
8644 	for (;;)
8645 	{
8646 	    dp = readdir(dirp);
8647 	    if (dp == NULL)
8648 		break;
8649 	    if ((dp->d_name[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot)
8650 		    && vim_regexec(&regmatch, (char_u *)dp->d_name, (colnr_T)0))
8651 	    {
8652 		STRCPY(s, dp->d_name);
8653 		len = STRLEN(buf);
8654 
8655 		if (starstar && stardepth < 100)
8656 		{
8657 		    /* For "**" in the pattern first go deeper in the tree to
8658 		     * find matches. */
8659 		    STRCPY(buf + len, "/**");
8660 		    STRCPY(buf + len + 3, path_end);
8661 		    ++stardepth;
8662 		    (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, TRUE);
8663 		    --stardepth;
8664 		}
8665 
8666 		STRCPY(buf + len, path_end);
8667 		if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end)) /* handle more wildcards */
8668 		{
8669 		    /* need to expand another component of the path */
8670 		    /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8671 		    (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, FALSE);
8672 		}
8673 		else
8674 		{
8675 		    /* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */
8676 		    /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8677 		    if (*path_end != NUL)
8678 			backslash_halve(buf + len + 1);
8679 		    if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0)	/* add existing file */
8680 		    {
8681 #ifdef MACOS_CONVERT
8682 			size_t precomp_len = STRLEN(buf)+1;
8683 			char_u *precomp_buf =
8684 			    mac_precompose_path(buf, precomp_len, &precomp_len);
8685 
8686 			if (precomp_buf)
8687 			{
8688 			    mch_memmove(buf, precomp_buf, precomp_len);
8689 			    vim_free(precomp_buf);
8690 			}
8691 #endif
8692 			addfile(gap, buf, flags);
8693 		    }
8694 		}
8695 	    }
8696 	}
8697 
8698 	closedir(dirp);
8699     }
8700 
8701     vim_free(buf);
8702     vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
8703 
8704     matches = gap->ga_len - start_len;
8705     if (matches > 0)
8706 	qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, matches,
8707 						   sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp);
8708     return matches;
8709 }
8710 #endif
8711 
8712 /*
8713  * Generic wildcard expansion code.
8714  *
8715  * Characters in "pat" that should not be expanded must be preceded with a
8716  * backslash. E.g., "/path\ with\ spaces/my\*star*"
8717  *
8718  * Return FAIL when no single file was found.  In this case "num_file" is not
8719  * set, and "file" may contain an error message.
8720  * Return OK when some files found.  "num_file" is set to the number of
8721  * matches, "file" to the array of matches.  Call FreeWild() later.
8722  */
8723     int
8724 gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
8725     int		num_pat;	/* number of input patterns */
8726     char_u	**pat;		/* array of input patterns */
8727     int		*num_file;	/* resulting number of files */
8728     char_u	***file;	/* array of resulting files */
8729     int		flags;		/* EW_* flags */
8730 {
8731     int			i;
8732     garray_T		ga;
8733     char_u		*p;
8734     static int		recursive = FALSE;
8735     int			add_pat;
8736 
8737     /*
8738      * expand_env() is called to expand things like "~user".  If this fails,
8739      * it calls ExpandOne(), which brings us back here.  In this case, always
8740      * call the machine specific expansion function, if possible.  Otherwise,
8741      * return FAIL.
8742      */
8743     if (recursive)
8744 #ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
8745 	return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8746 #else
8747 	return FAIL;
8748 #endif
8749 
8750 #ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
8751     /*
8752      * If there are any special wildcard characters which we cannot handle
8753      * here, call machine specific function for all the expansion.  This
8754      * avoids starting the shell for each argument separately.
8755      * For `=expr` do use the internal function.
8756      */
8757     for (i = 0; i < num_pat; i++)
8758     {
8759 	if (vim_strpbrk(pat[i], (char_u *)SPECIAL_WILDCHAR) != NULL
8760 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8761 		&& !(vim_backtick(pat[i]) && pat[i][1] == '=')
8762 # endif
8763 	   )
8764 	    return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8765     }
8766 #endif
8767 
8768     recursive = TRUE;
8769 
8770     /*
8771      * The matching file names are stored in a growarray.  Init it empty.
8772      */
8773     ga_init2(&ga, (int)sizeof(char_u *), 30);
8774 
8775     for (i = 0; i < num_pat; ++i)
8776     {
8777 	add_pat = -1;
8778 	p = pat[i];
8779 
8780 #ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8781 	if (vim_backtick(p))
8782 	    add_pat = expand_backtick(&ga, p, flags);
8783 	else
8784 #endif
8785 	{
8786 	    /*
8787 	     * First expand environment variables, "~/" and "~user/".
8788 	     */
8789 	    if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL)
8790 	    {
8791 		p = expand_env_save(p);
8792 		if (p == NULL)
8793 		    p = pat[i];
8794 #ifdef UNIX
8795 		/*
8796 		 * On Unix, if expand_env() can't expand an environment
8797 		 * variable, use the shell to do that.  Discard previously
8798 		 * found file names and start all over again.
8799 		 */
8800 		else if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL)
8801 		{
8802 		    vim_free(p);
8803 		    ga_clear(&ga);
8804 		    i = mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file,
8805 								       flags);
8806 		    recursive = FALSE;
8807 		    return i;
8808 		}
8809 #endif
8810 	    }
8811 
8812 	    /*
8813 	     * If there are wildcards: Expand file names and add each match to
8814 	     * the list.  If there is no match, and EW_NOTFOUND is given, add
8815 	     * the pattern.
8816 	     * If there are no wildcards: Add the file name if it exists or
8817 	     * when EW_NOTFOUND is given.
8818 	     */
8819 	    if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(p))
8820 		add_pat = mch_expandpath(&ga, p, flags);
8821 	}
8822 
8823 	if (add_pat == -1 || (add_pat == 0 && (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)))
8824 	{
8825 	    char_u	*t = backslash_halve_save(p);
8826 
8827 #if defined(MACOS_CLASSIC)
8828 	    slash_to_colon(t);
8829 #endif
8830 	    /* When EW_NOTFOUND is used, always add files and dirs.  Makes
8831 	     * "vim c:/" work. */
8832 	    if (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)
8833 		addfile(&ga, t, flags | EW_DIR | EW_FILE);
8834 	    else if (mch_getperm(t) >= 0)
8835 		addfile(&ga, t, flags);
8836 	    vim_free(t);
8837 	}
8838 
8839 	if (p != pat[i])
8840 	    vim_free(p);
8841     }
8842 
8843     *num_file = ga.ga_len;
8844     *file = (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? (char_u **)ga.ga_data : (char_u **)"";
8845 
8846     recursive = FALSE;
8847 
8848     return (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? OK : FAIL;
8849 }
8850 
8851 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8852 
8853 /*
8854  * Return TRUE if we can expand this backtick thing here.
8855  */
8856     static int
8857 vim_backtick(p)
8858     char_u	*p;
8859 {
8860     return (*p == '`' && *(p + 1) != NUL && *(p + STRLEN(p) - 1) == '`');
8861 }
8862 
8863 /*
8864  * Expand an item in `backticks` by executing it as a command.
8865  * Currently only works when pat[] starts and ends with a `.
8866  * Returns number of file names found.
8867  */
8868     static int
8869 expand_backtick(gap, pat, flags)
8870     garray_T	*gap;
8871     char_u	*pat;
8872     int		flags;	/* EW_* flags */
8873 {
8874     char_u	*p;
8875     char_u	*cmd;
8876     char_u	*buffer;
8877     int		cnt = 0;
8878     int		i;
8879 
8880     /* Create the command: lop off the backticks. */
8881     cmd = vim_strnsave(pat + 1, (int)STRLEN(pat) - 2);
8882     if (cmd == NULL)
8883 	return 0;
8884 
8885 #ifdef FEAT_EVAL
8886     if (*cmd == '=')	    /* `={expr}`: Expand expression */
8887 	buffer = eval_to_string(cmd + 1, &p, TRUE);
8888     else
8889 #endif
8890 	buffer = get_cmd_output(cmd, NULL,
8891 				      (flags & EW_SILENT) ? SHELL_SILENT : 0);
8892     vim_free(cmd);
8893     if (buffer == NULL)
8894 	return 0;
8895 
8896     cmd = buffer;
8897     while (*cmd != NUL)
8898     {
8899 	cmd = skipwhite(cmd);		/* skip over white space */
8900 	p = cmd;
8901 	while (*p != NUL && *p != '\r' && *p != '\n') /* skip over entry */
8902 	    ++p;
8903 	/* add an entry if it is not empty */
8904 	if (p > cmd)
8905 	{
8906 	    i = *p;
8907 	    *p = NUL;
8908 	    addfile(gap, cmd, flags);
8909 	    *p = i;
8910 	    ++cnt;
8911 	}
8912 	cmd = p;
8913 	while (*cmd != NUL && (*cmd == '\r' || *cmd == '\n'))
8914 	    ++cmd;
8915     }
8916 
8917     vim_free(buffer);
8918     return cnt;
8919 }
8920 # endif /* VIM_BACKTICK */
8921 
8922 /*
8923  * Add a file to a file list.  Accepted flags:
8924  * EW_DIR	add directories
8925  * EW_FILE	add files
8926  * EW_EXEC	add executable files
8927  * EW_NOTFOUND	add even when it doesn't exist
8928  * EW_ADDSLASH	add slash after directory name
8929  */
8930     void
8931 addfile(gap, f, flags)
8932     garray_T	*gap;
8933     char_u	*f;	/* filename */
8934     int		flags;
8935 {
8936     char_u	*p;
8937     int		isdir;
8938 
8939     /* if the file/dir doesn't exist, may not add it */
8940     if (!(flags & EW_NOTFOUND) && mch_getperm(f) < 0)
8941 	return;
8942 
8943 #ifdef FNAME_ILLEGAL
8944     /* if the file/dir contains illegal characters, don't add it */
8945     if (vim_strpbrk(f, (char_u *)FNAME_ILLEGAL) != NULL)
8946 	return;
8947 #endif
8948 
8949     isdir = mch_isdir(f);
8950     if ((isdir && !(flags & EW_DIR)) || (!isdir && !(flags & EW_FILE)))
8951 	return;
8952 
8953     /* If the file isn't executable, may not add it.  Do accept directories. */
8954     if (!isdir && (flags & EW_EXEC) && !mch_can_exe(f))
8955 	return;
8956 
8957     /* Make room for another item in the file list. */
8958     if (ga_grow(gap, 1) == FAIL)
8959 	return;
8960 
8961     p = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(f) + 1 + isdir));
8962     if (p == NULL)
8963 	return;
8964 
8965     STRCPY(p, f);
8966 #ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
8967     slash_adjust(p);
8968 #endif
8969     /*
8970      * Append a slash or backslash after directory names if none is present.
8971      */
8972 #ifndef DONT_ADD_PATHSEP_TO_DIR
8973     if (isdir && (flags & EW_ADDSLASH))
8974 	add_pathsep(p);
8975 #endif
8976     ((char_u **)gap->ga_data)[gap->ga_len++] = p;
8977 }
8978 #endif /* !NO_EXPANDPATH */
8979 
8980 #if defined(VIM_BACKTICK) || defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
8981 
8982 #ifndef SEEK_SET
8983 # define SEEK_SET 0
8984 #endif
8985 #ifndef SEEK_END
8986 # define SEEK_END 2
8987 #endif
8988 
8989 /*
8990  * Get the stdout of an external command.
8991  * Returns an allocated string, or NULL for error.
8992  */
8993     char_u *
8994 get_cmd_output(cmd, infile, flags)
8995     char_u	*cmd;
8996     char_u	*infile;	/* optional input file name */
8997     int		flags;		/* can be SHELL_SILENT */
8998 {
8999     char_u	*tempname;
9000     char_u	*command;
9001     char_u	*buffer = NULL;
9002     int		len;
9003     int		i = 0;
9004     FILE	*fd;
9005 
9006     if (check_restricted() || check_secure())
9007 	return NULL;
9008 
9009     /* get a name for the temp file */
9010     if ((tempname = vim_tempname('o')) == NULL)
9011     {
9012 	EMSG(_(e_notmp));
9013 	return NULL;
9014     }
9015 
9016     /* Add the redirection stuff */
9017     command = make_filter_cmd(cmd, infile, tempname);
9018     if (command == NULL)
9019 	goto done;
9020 
9021     /*
9022      * Call the shell to execute the command (errors are ignored).
9023      * Don't check timestamps here.
9024      */
9025     ++no_check_timestamps;
9026     call_shell(command, SHELL_DOOUT | SHELL_EXPAND | flags);
9027     --no_check_timestamps;
9028 
9029     vim_free(command);
9030 
9031     /*
9032      * read the names from the file into memory
9033      */
9034 # ifdef VMS
9035     /* created temporary file is not allways readable as binary */
9036     fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, "r");
9037 # else
9038     fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, READBIN);
9039 # endif
9040 
9041     if (fd == NULL)
9042     {
9043 	EMSG2(_(e_notopen), tempname);
9044 	goto done;
9045     }
9046 
9047     fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_END);
9048     len = ftell(fd);		    /* get size of temp file */
9049     fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_SET);
9050 
9051     buffer = alloc(len + 1);
9052     if (buffer != NULL)
9053 	i = (int)fread((char *)buffer, (size_t)1, (size_t)len, fd);
9054     fclose(fd);
9055     mch_remove(tempname);
9056     if (buffer == NULL)
9057 	goto done;
9058 #ifdef VMS
9059     len = i;	/* VMS doesn't give us what we asked for... */
9060 #endif
9061     if (i != len)
9062     {
9063 	EMSG2(_(e_notread), tempname);
9064 	vim_free(buffer);
9065 	buffer = NULL;
9066     }
9067     else
9068 	buffer[len] = '\0';	/* make sure the buffer is terminated */
9069 
9070 done:
9071     vim_free(tempname);
9072     return buffer;
9073 }
9074 #endif
9075 
9076 /*
9077  * Free the list of files returned by expand_wildcards() or other expansion
9078  * functions.
9079  */
9080     void
9081 FreeWild(count, files)
9082     int	    count;
9083     char_u  **files;
9084 {
9085     if (files == NULL || count <= 0)
9086 	return;
9087 #if defined(__EMX__) && defined(__ALWAYS_HAS_TRAILING_NULL_POINTER) /* XXX */
9088     /*
9089      * Is this still OK for when other functions than expand_wildcards() have
9090      * been used???
9091      */
9092     _fnexplodefree((char **)files);
9093 #else
9094     while (count--)
9095 	vim_free(files[count]);
9096     vim_free(files);
9097 #endif
9098 }
9099 
9100 /*
9101  * return TRUE when need to go to Insert mode because of 'insertmode'.
9102  * Don't do this when still processing a command or a mapping.
9103  * Don't do this when inside a ":normal" command.
9104  */
9105     int
9106 goto_im()
9107 {
9108     return (p_im && stuff_empty() && typebuf_typed());
9109 }
9110